Toshiba Estudio E Studio 350 User Manual
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS  
Printing Guide  
USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI-  
BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, NOR FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS.  
U.S. Government Restricted Rights  
The Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Govern-  
ment is subject to restrictions set forth in subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or (c) (i) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data  
and Computer Software Clause set forth in 252.227-7013, or 52.227-19 (c) (2) of the DOD FAR, as appro-  
priate. Contractor/Manufacturer is TOSHIBA TEC Corporation, 2-4-1, Shibakoen, Minato-ku, Tokyo,  
105-8524, Japan.  
General  
You may not sublicense, lease, rent, assign or transfer this license or the Software. Any attempt to subli-  
cense, lease, rent, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is void. You agree that  
you do not intend to, and will not ship, transmit (directly or indirectly) the Software, including any copies of  
the Software, or any technical data contained in the Software or its media, or any direct product thereof, to  
any country or destination prohibited by the United States Government. This license shall be governed by  
the laws of Japan or, at the election of a Supplier of TTEC concerned with a dispute arising from or relating  
to this Agreement, the laws of the Country designated from time to time by the relevant Supplier of TTEC. If  
any provision or portion of this Agreement shall be found to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the remain-  
ing provisions or portions shall remain in full force and effect.  
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU  
UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDI-  
TIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE  
AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND SUPER-  
SEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COM-  
MUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.  
TOSHIBA TEC Corporation, 2-4-1, Shibakoen, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 105-8524, Japan.  
Printing Guide — SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT  
3
TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT  
Trademarks  
•
•
•
•
•
•
The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.  
The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Me Operating System.  
The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.  
The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.  
The official name of Windows Server 2003 is Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft prod-  
ucts are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.  
Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, Mac, TrueType, and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.  
in the US and other countries.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Postscript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.  
IBM, AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.  
NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks of Novell, Inc.  
Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective compa-  
nies.  
Copyright  
© 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved  
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of  
TTEC. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.  
4
Printing Guide — TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT  
 
Preface  
Thank you for purchasing e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280  
Series Multifunctional Digital Systems. This guide provides instructions on how to set up your  
computer and print to the equipment. Read this guide before printing to your e-STUDIO4511  
Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series. Keep this guide within easy reach, and  
use it to configure an environment that makes best of the e-STUDIO’s functions.  
About This Guide  
This manual describes how to install the user software for the printer functions, set up printing,  
and manage print jobs from Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS, and UNIX computers.  
For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the e-STUDIO4511 Series,  
e-STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series, see the Network Administrator’s Guide. For  
general information on using the copier, your computer, your application software, or your net-  
work, see the manuals that accompany those products.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series: This manual applies the equipment  
that either the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed.  
Conventions  
•
The term “this equipment” in this manual refers to the e-STUDIO4511 Series,  
e-STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series.  
•
The term “e-Filing” in this manual is an abbreviation of “electronic filing”.  
About Other Manuals  
Other guides are included in the User Documentation CD-ROM provided with this system:  
Network Operator’s Guide—explains how to set up and manage network functions using the  
TopAccess user functions — such as network job management and template registration — from  
client computers via a network.  
Network Administrator’s Guide— explains the basic configuration and administration of the  
equipment in supported platform and network environments. It also includes guidelines for set-  
ting up network servers to provide various network services.  
e-Filing Guide—explains how to operate the e-Filing features by using the TWAIN driver, File  
Downloader and e-Filing web utility.  
Network Fax Guide—explains how to use the network fax features that enable users to operate  
fax and internet fax sending from a client computer via network.  
Printing Guide — Preface  
5
       
Table of Contents  
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT...........................................................2  
TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT................................................................4  
Preface ...........................................................................................................5  
About This Guide....................................................................................................5  
Conventions......................................................................................................5  
About Other Manuals..............................................................................................5  
Table of Contents ...........................................................................................6  
1. Overview .........................................................................................................13  
Features and Functions................................................................................14  
About the Client CD-ROM ............................................................................15  
For Windows.........................................................................................................15  
For Macintosh.......................................................................................................16  
For UNIX...............................................................................................................16  
2. Installing Client Software ..............................................................................17  
Installing Client Software for Windows .........................................................18  
About Client Software for Windows ......................................................................18  
Planning for Installation ........................................................................................18  
Before Installing Client Software.....................................................................18  
When GL-DocMon Has Been Installed .....................................................18  
When TopAccessDocMon Has Been Installed..........................................18  
Types of Printer Drivers ..................................................................................19  
System Requirements.....................................................................................19  
About Installation Procedure...........................................................................20  
Parallel Port Connection............................................................................20  
USB Connection........................................................................................21  
Local Area Network over TCP/IP ..............................................................21  
Internet Connection...................................................................................23  
Novell Printing ...........................................................................................24  
Installing the Client Software for Parallel Printing.................................................25  
Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer..........................................25  
Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play............................................31  
Windows 98/Me.........................................................................................31  
Windows 2000...........................................................................................34  
Windows XP/Server 2003 .........................................................................37  
Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard....................................40  
Windows 98/Me.........................................................................................40  
Windows NT 4.0........................................................................................44  
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ................................................................48  
Installing the Client Software for USB Printing .....................................................53  
Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play................................................54  
Windows 98/Me.........................................................................................54  
Windows 2000...........................................................................................60  
Windows XP/Server 2003 .........................................................................63  
Installing the Client Software for LPR Printing......................................................66  
Installation for LPR Printing Using the Installer...............................................66  
Windows NT 4.0........................................................................................66  
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ................................................................69  
Installation for LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard.........................................74  
Windows NT 4.0........................................................................................75  
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ................................................................80  
Installing the Client Software for SMB Printing.....................................................89  
Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer..............................................89  
6
Printing Guide — Table of Contents  
 
Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port...........................95  
Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print ............................................100  
Windows 98/Me.......................................................................................101  
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003...................................................103  
Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard......................................104  
Windows 98/Me.......................................................................................104  
Windows NT 4.0......................................................................................107  
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ..............................................................112  
Installing the Client Software for Peer-to-Peer Printing ......................................118  
Installation and Configuration of Peer-to-Peer Utility ....................................118  
Installing the Client Software for IPP Printing.....................................................127  
Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard........................................127  
Installing the Client Software for Novell Printing.................................................132  
Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer..........................................133  
Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print ..........................................140  
Windows 98/Me.......................................................................................141  
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003...................................................145  
Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard....................................148  
Windows 98/Me.......................................................................................148  
Windows NT 4.0......................................................................................151  
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ..............................................................156  
Uninstalling the Client1 Software........................................................................162  
When Installed Using the Installer.................................................................162  
When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard.....................................................167  
Installing Client Software for Macintosh .....................................................169  
About Client Software for Macintosh ..................................................................169  
Planning for Installation ......................................................................................169  
System Requirements...................................................................................169  
Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x .............................................................169  
Installing the Macintosh PPD File .................................................................169  
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x ...................................................170  
Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later ..............................................176  
Installing the Macintosh PPD File .................................................................176  
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X............................................................177  
Configuring the Installable Options ...............................................................182  
Installing Client Software for UNIX .............................................................185  
About Client Software for UNIX ..........................................................................185  
Planning for Installation ......................................................................................186  
System Requirements...................................................................................186  
Installing the Printer on UNIX .............................................................................186  
Installing the UNIX Filters..............................................................................186  
Configuring the Print Queue..........................................................................187  
Creating a Print Queue Using est4511add/estbwadd .............................188  
Creating a Print Queue Manually ............................................................188  
Changing the Default Values ........................................................................192  
Deleting the Print Queue...............................................................................193  
Deleting a Print Queue Using est4511rm/estbwrm .................................193  
Deleting a Print Queue Manually.............................................................193  
Installing the CUPS.......................................................................................195  
Other Installation Procedures.....................................................................198  
Installing the Client Software from TopAccess ...................................................198  
3. Printing..........................................................................................................203  
Printing from Windows................................................................................204  
Printing Guide — Table of Contents  
7
Before Using the Printer Driver...........................................................................204  
Configuring the Options ................................................................................204  
Configuring the Options Manually ...........................................................205  
Configuring the Options Automatically ....................................................206  
Setting the Department Code........................................................................208  
Copying the PPD File for Windows...............................................................210  
Printing from Application.....................................................................................211  
Considerations and Limitations.....................................................................211  
How to Print...................................................................................................211  
Setting Up Print Options .....................................................................................212  
How to Setup.................................................................................................213  
Setting Initial Values of Print Options......................................................213  
Setting Print Options for Each Print Job..................................................213  
Setting Print Options Using Profiles ........................................................213  
Print Options .................................................................................................216  
Setup Tab................................................................................................218  
Print Job Tab...........................................................................................224  
Layout Tab - Standard Window...............................................................226  
Layout Tab - Booklet Window .................................................................230  
Layout Tab - Multiple Pages per Sheet Window .....................................233  
Effect Tab................................................................................................235  
Image Quality Tab...................................................................................239  
Font Tab..................................................................................................244  
Configuration Tab....................................................................................246  
About Tab................................................................................................249  
Printing with Extended Print Functionality ..........................................................249  
Printing Various Print Job Types...................................................................249  
Printing Scheduled Print Jobs .................................................................249  
Printing Private Print Jobs.......................................................................250  
Printing Proof Print Jobs..........................................................................251  
Creating An Overlay File .........................................................................251  
Storing to e-Filing ....................................................................................252  
Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options......................................253  
Sort Printing.............................................................................................253  
Enlarge/Reduce Printing .........................................................................255  
Printing Color Document in Gray scale ...................................................255  
Stapling and Hole Punching....................................................................256  
Printing on Both Sides of a Sheet ...........................................................257  
Printing or Inserting Sheets from Different Paper Sources .....................258  
Interleaving Pages...................................................................................259  
Printing Booklets .....................................................................................260  
Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet............................................263  
Using Watermarks...................................................................................265  
Printing with an Overlay File....................................................................267  
Printing on a Tab Paper ..........................................................................269  
Printing from Macintosh..............................................................................271  
Printing from an Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x.............................................271  
How to Print from Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ............................................................271  
Selecting the Printer in the Chooser........................................................271  
Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers .......................272  
Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x ..............................273  
Page Attributes........................................................................................273  
Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x..........................................274  
General....................................................................................................274  
Background Printing................................................................................275  
8
Printing Guide — Table of Contents  
Color Matching ........................................................................................276  
Cover Page .............................................................................................276  
Font Settings ...........................................................................................277  
Job Logging.............................................................................................277  
Layout......................................................................................................278  
Finishing Options.....................................................................................280  
Printing Modes ........................................................................................283  
Booklet Mode Options.............................................................................284  
Watermark Options .................................................................................285  
Quality .....................................................................................................286  
Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later .......................................288  
How to Print from Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later..................................................288  
Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers .......................288  
Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later................289  
Page Attributes........................................................................................290  
Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later...........................291  
Copies & Pages.......................................................................................291  
Layout......................................................................................................292  
Duplex .....................................................................................................294  
Output Options ........................................................................................295  
Scheduler ................................................................................................295  
Paper Handling........................................................................................296  
Cover Page .............................................................................................297  
Error Handling .........................................................................................298  
Paper Feed..............................................................................................298  
Printer Features.......................................................................................299  
Printing from UNIX......................................................................................309  
Printing from an Application................................................................................309  
Considerations and Limitations.....................................................................309  
Printing using LP Command .........................................................................309  
Generic “lp” and “lptap” Options....................................................................309  
Copies .....................................................................................................309  
Title..........................................................................................................309  
General Options............................................................................................310  
Print Language........................................................................................310  
Color Mode..............................................................................................310  
Stapling ...................................................................................................310  
Output Bin ...............................................................................................311  
Hole Punching.........................................................................................312  
Media Type..............................................................................................312  
Paper Source ..........................................................................................313  
Duplexing ................................................................................................313  
Paper Sizes.............................................................................................313  
Printing Modes ........................................................................................314  
Department Code....................................................................................315  
Smoothing ...............................................................................................315  
Distinguish Thin Lines .............................................................................315  
Do not Print Blank Pages ........................................................................316  
Toner Save..............................................................................................316  
Booklet Modes.........................................................................................316  
Page Layout ............................................................................................317  
Center Margin..........................................................................................318  
Outer Margin ...........................................................................................318  
Orientation...............................................................................................318  
Font Pitch ................................................................................................319  
Printing Guide — Table of Contents  
9
Page Length............................................................................................319  
Pure Black and Pure Gray.......................................................................319  
PCL5e Specific Options ................................................................................320  
Text Wrapping.........................................................................................320  
Left Margin ..............................................................................................320  
Right Margin............................................................................................320  
Top Margin ..............................................................................................321  
Text Length .............................................................................................321  
Banner Page ...........................................................................................321  
PS Specific Options ......................................................................................323  
Black Over Print ......................................................................................323  
Other Printing Methods...............................................................................324  
FTP Printing........................................................................................................324  
Email Printing......................................................................................................325  
4. Monitoring Print Jobs ..................................................................................327  
Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon ..........................................328  
Features and Functions......................................................................................328  
How to Use TopAccessDocMon.........................................................................328  
Running TopAccessDocMon.........................................................................328  
Starting TopAccessDocMon....................................................................328  
Document Monitor Taskbar Menu...........................................................329  
Configuring TopAccessDocMon....................................................................329  
Configuring the Start Up Options ............................................................330  
Configuring the Notifications ...................................................................330  
Changing the Refresh Rate.....................................................................331  
Finding the Printer Address.....................................................................333  
Monitoring the Printer .........................................................................................333  
How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window ..........................................333  
Accessing from the Document Monitor Menu .........................................333  
Accessing from the Printers File Menu....................................................334  
Searching for a Printer ............................................................................335  
TopAccessDocMon Window .........................................................................339  
Checking Device Status ..........................................................................341  
Changing Monitoring Devices .................................................................342  
Adding Devices .......................................................................................342  
Monitoring Queues..................................................................................347  
Event Notification..........................................................................................350  
5. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................351  
When Printing cannot be Performed ..........................................................352  
Printer Driver Errors....................................................................................354  
Printer Driver Installation Error Messages..........................................................354  
Setup Needs to Copy Windows NT Files......................................................354  
Client Software CD Now Required................................................................354  
File *.DRV on Client CD Count Not Be Found ..............................................354  
Location Does Not Contain Information About Your Hardware.....................354  
This Port is Currently in Use .........................................................................354  
Problem with the Current Printer Setup ........................................................355  
Printer Driver General Errors..............................................................................355  
Driver Mapped to Wrong Port .......................................................................355  
Command Line Options Not Processed........................................................355  
Cannot Remember Document Password......................................................356  
Retrieval of Printer Configuration Failed .......................................................356  
10  
Printing Guide — Table of Contents  
Cannot Print a Job Using SMB .....................................................................356  
Cannot Print a Job as Expected Using PS Printer Driver .............................356  
TopAccessDocMon Errors..........................................................................357  
TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions..................................................................357  
The Device is Not Responding......................................................................357  
Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue...................................357  
Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages/Warnings/Errors................357  
TopAccessDocMon Error Messages ..................................................................358  
TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages...................................................358  
TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages...............................................359  
Device Status Indicators.....................................................................................364  
6. Appendix.......................................................................................................367  
Managing Fonts with Font Manager...........................................................368  
Installing Font Manager ......................................................................................368  
Searching Fonts..................................................................................................368  
Installing Fonts in Windows ................................................................................369  
Uninstalling Fonts in Windows............................................................................369  
Removing Fonts from the Computer...................................................................369  
Displaying Font Preview .....................................................................................370  
Creating a Font Group........................................................................................370  
Sorting Fonts in the List......................................................................................371  
Sorting by Name ...........................................................................................371  
Sorting by Font Type.....................................................................................371  
Inverting the alphabetical Order....................................................................371  
Internal Fonts List.......................................................................................372  
Internal PCL Fonts List .......................................................................................372  
Internal PS Fonts List .........................................................................................373  
7. INDEX ............................................................................................................375  
Printing Guide — Table of Contents  
11  
12  
Printing Guide — Table of Contents  
1. OVERVIEW  
Printing Guide — 1. Overview  
13  
 
Features and Functions  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The printing features are available only when the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed.  
„
Extensive Client Platform Support  
This equipment supports printing from IBM-compatible PC, Macintosh, and Unix workstations.  
Not all features are supported on all platforms, however.  
„
Various Port Options  
You can map this equipment to print to a SMB, Peer-to-Peer, IPP, or LPR port.  
„
Multiple Job Types  
Job Types refer to the way this equipment handles a print job.  
•
•
•
Normal mode requires no special handling and is the most frequently used printing mode.  
Scheduled Print lets you specify the time and date at which to print a job.  
Private Print mode allows you to hold a job in the print queue until you enter a Document  
Identification Number (DIN) at the copier front panel to print the job.  
Proof Print mode prints the first copy of a multi-copy job then awaits your approval before  
printing the remaining copies.  
•
•
Overlay Image File prints a document element, such as text or graphics, to a file for superim-  
posing on other documents.  
„
Professional Finishing Options  
Depending on the type of finishing units you have installed on this equipment, you can choose to  
sort, group, fold and staple your documents (including saddle-stitching) and punch binding holes  
along the top or side edge.  
„
Sophisticated Document Layout and Assembly Options  
You can choose whether to print your document as you have set it up in the application, or to  
impose printer-driven document layout options such as printing in Book Format or printing Mul-  
tiple Pages per Sheet.  
Additionally, the printer drivers provide the ability to print selected pages on different media.  
This includes printing front and back covers, inserting sheets at predefined positions within the  
document, or interleaving pages so that every other page is inserted blank or printed on a differ-  
ent type of media.  
„
Watermark and Image Overlay Support  
Watermarks are a great way to subtly convey useful information about your printed documents.  
Common watermarks are “Confidential,” “Draft,” and “Original.” Several watermarks have  
been pre-defined for use with your documents, or you can create and save your own custom  
watermarks.  
Watermarks consist of text. Image Overlays can be any combination of text, graphics or other  
document elements.  
Printing watermarks consumes fewer resources than using Image Overlays, so you should use  
watermarks wherever possible, particularly when printing speed is an issue.  
14  
Printing Guide — Features and Functions  
 
About the Client CD-ROM  
For Windows  
The contents of the Client1 CD-ROM:  
Client Software Installer  
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\setup.exe  
This is the setup program to install the printer drivers, TopAccessDocMon, and Font Man-  
ager on your computer.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Font Manager is not provided in the Client1 CD-ROM for e-STUDIO450 Series and  
e-STUDIO280 Series. The Font Manager is provided in the Font CD-ROM that comes with  
the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
PCL5c Printer Drivers (Color)  
•
•
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\9X_ME\PCL5C\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows 98/Me for  
each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\NT\PCL5C\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows NT 4.0 for  
each language version by Add Printer Wizard.  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows 2000/XP/  
Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The PCL5c Printer Driver is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
PCL6 Printer Drivers (Black/White)  
•
•
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 98/Me for  
each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\NT\PCL6\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows NT 4.0 for  
each language version by Add Printer Wizard.  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 2000/XP/  
Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.  
PS3 Printer Drivers (PostScript)  
•
•
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\9X_ME\PS\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 98/Me for each  
language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\NT\PS\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows NT 4.0 for each  
language version by Add Printer Wizard.  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 2000/XP/Server  
2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.  
Printing Guide — About the Client CD-ROM  
15  
   
Peer-to-Peer Utility for Windows 98/Me  
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\PtoP\  
This includes the setup files to install the Peer-to-Peer Utility on the Windows 98/Me.  
USB Driver for Windows 98  
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\USB\<language>\  
This includes the setup files to install the USB driver on the Windows 98 for each language  
version.  
Printer Driver Setup files (Zip Compressed)  
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\PandP\<language>\  
This includes the compressed zip files that contain the setup files to install each printer  
driver for each language version.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter.  
P.18 "About Client Software for Windows".  
For Macintosh  
The contents of the Client1 CD-ROM:  
Macintosh PPD files  
•
[Client1 CD-ROM]:MacPPD:<language>:  
This includes the PPD file for Apple LaserWriter8 to enable printing from Macintosh on the  
Mac OS 8.6, Mac OS 9.x, and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic Mode, the PPD file to enable  
printing from Macintosh on the Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
Further information about user software for Macintosh is described in next chapter.  
P.169 "About Client Software for Macintosh".  
For UNIX  
The contents of the Admin’s Client CD-ROM:  
Solaris Filter  
•
[Admin’s Client CD-ROM]/SolarisFilter/<language>/  
This includes the Tar file for Solaris v2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9.  
HP-UX Filter  
•
[Admin’s Client CD-ROM]/HP-UXFilter/<language>/  
This includes the Tar file for HP-UX ver.10.20/11.x.  
AIX Filter  
[Admin’s Client CD-ROM]/AIXFilter/<language>/  
This includes the Tar file for AIX 4.1.5/4.3.3/5L.  
Linux Filter  
[Admin’s Client CD-ROM]/LinuxFilter/<language>/  
•
•
This includes the Tar file for Red Hat 6.2/7.1/7.2/7.3/8.0, SuSE Linux 7.0/8.1, Mandrake  
Linux 7.1/9 and Turbo Linux 8.  
SCO Unix Filter  
•
[Admin’s Client CD-ROM]/OpenUnixFilter/<language>/  
This includes the Tar file for SCO UnixWare 7 and SCO OpenUnix 8.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter.  
P.185 "About Client Software for UNIX".  
16  
Printing Guide — About the Client CD-ROM  
   
2. INSTALLING CLIENT SOFTWARE  
Printing Guide — 2. Installing Client Software  
17  
 
Installing Client Software for Windows  
This section provides instructions for configuring the printing systems on Windows computers.  
About Client Software for Windows  
„
Printer Drivers  
Printer drivers are software components that enable application programs to interact with the  
printer. The e-STUDIO4511 Series comes with three printer drivers, PCL5c, PCL6, and PS3  
(PostScript) printer drivers, and e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series comes with two  
printer drivers, PCL6 and PS3 (PostScript) printer drivers. These printer drivers offer document  
print, layout and assembly functions that are not available with many applications.  
„
TopAccessDocMon  
This utility allows you to monitor all jobs and control your own current jobs. With the notifica-  
tion feature enabled, TopAccessDocMon informs you of copier or printing events, such as  
paper-out or drawer open, before you walk to the copier to find your job incomplete or unsuc-  
cessful.  
„
Agfa Font Manager  
This utility allows you to install and manage the TrueType fonts that are corresponding to the  
internal PS fonts on the equipment.  
„
Peer-to-Peer Utility  
This utility allows you to create a Peer-to-Peer port on your computer to enable Peer-to-Peer  
printing. This utility is only available for Windows 98 and Windows Me.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
There is another job monitoring utility, TopAccess, which allows you to monitor and  
manage your print jobs over the Internet using either Netscape Navigator or Internet  
Explorer. Because TopAccess is an embedded web-based device and job manage-  
ment tool it does not require your installation.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is separately provided in the Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer  
Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
Planning for Installation  
This section will help you to plan an installation suited to your environment. Before installing  
the client software, read this section.  
Before Installing Client Software  
Before installing the client software, confirm the followings to perform an appropriate installa-  
tion.  
— When GL-DocMon Has Been Installed  
If the GL-DocMon for GL-1010 or GL-1020 has been installed, uninstall the GL-DocMon to  
install the TopAccessDocMon. TopAccessDocMon can be used to monitor the GL-1010 and  
GL-1020 controller.  
— When TopAccessDocMon Has Been Installed  
If the TopAcceessDocMon has been installed from either the e-STUDIO4511 Series Client1  
CD-ROM, e-STUDIO450 Series Client1 CD-ROM, or e-STUDIO280 Series Client1 CD-ROM,  
you do not have to install it from the other one. TopAccessDocMon can be used to monitor both  
devices.  
18  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
                       
If you want to install it from the other CD-ROM, uninstall the TopAccessDocMon then install it.  
When you uninstall the TopAccessDocMon, please click [No] at the dialog box that displays the  
message to delete the settings for the TopAccessDocMon so that you can restore the settings  
after installing new one.  
Types of Printer Drivers  
•
•
•
The PCL5c Printer Driver — for printing color documents that use TrueType fonts, such  
as a Microsoft Word.  
The PCL6 Printer Driver — for printing gray scale documents that use TrueType fonts,  
such as a Microsoft Word.  
The PS3 Printer Driver — for high-graphical-content documents that use PostScript fonts  
and graphics, such as Adobe PageMaker.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The PCL5c Printer Driver is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
System Requirements  
To install the printer drivers and other client software on a Windows workstation, the following  
is required.  
„
•
Display Resolution  
1024 x 768 dots or more  
„
Display Color  
•
„
•
High Color (16bit) or higher is recommended  
CPU  
Pentium 133 MHz minimum (Pentium 266 MHz or faster recommended)  
Memory  
„
•
64MB for Windows 98  
•
•
96MB for Windows Me and Windows NT 4.0  
128MB for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
The applicable computers depend on the printing systems:  
„
LPR Printing  
•
•
•
•
Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a  
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4  
Windows XP Service Pack 1  
Windows Server 2003  
„
SMB Printing  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows 98 (Windows 98 Second Edition Recommended)  
Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a  
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4  
Windows XP Service Pack 1  
Windows Server 2003  
„
Peer-to-Peer Printing  
•
•
Windows 98 (Windows 98 Second Edition Recommended)  
Windows Me  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
19  
           
„
IPP Printing  
•
•
•
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4  
Windows XP Service Pack 1  
Windows Server 2003  
About Installation Procedure  
Please find the installation procedure suited to your environment from the following:  
P.20 "Parallel Port Connection"  
P.21 "USB Connection"  
P.21 "Local Area Network over TCP/IP"  
P.23 "Internet Connection"  
P.24 "Novell Printing"  
— Parallel Port Connection  
Available for:  
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
Windows Server 2003  
Connecting with Parallel cable  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows Server 2003  
Setting up the LPT1 Printer  
Connection  
When this equipment is connected to your computer with a printer cable, you can install the  
printer drivers from the Client1 CD-ROM and set up the printer connection with LPT1 port.  
P.25 "Installing the Client Software for Parallel Printing".  
NOTE:  
•
Parallel printing is available only when the Parallel Interface is installed.  
20  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
     
— USB Connection  
Available for:  
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003  
Connecting with USB  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows Server 2003  
Setting up the USB Printer  
Connection  
This equipment supports the USB 2.0 Full Speed connection. When this equipment is connected  
to your computer with the USB cable, you must install the printer drivers using the Windows  
Plug and Play functions.  
P.53 "Installing the Client Software for USB Printing"  
— Local Area Network over TCP/IP  
When this equipment is connected to your computer in the local area network over TCP/IP, vari-  
ous printing methods are available such as:  
- LPR Printing (only available for Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003)  
- SMB Printing  
- Using Peer-to-Peer Utility (only available for Windows 98/Me)  
Some of them are applicable to your environments, the printing methods generally recom-  
mended are decided by the Windows version.  
•
•
Windows 98, Windows Me — SMB Printing or Peer-to-Peer Printing  
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 — LPR Printing  
If you have no advance for an installation from your administrator, check these printing methods  
whether they are suited to your network environments.  
NOTE:  
•
•
It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT  
4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is  
recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further informa-  
tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Adminis-  
trator’s Guide.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
You can also perform FTP printing over the TCP/IP network. For more information  
about FTP printing, please refer to following section.  
P.324 "FTP Printing"  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
21  
       
LPR Printing  
NOTE:  
•
LPR printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed.  
Available for:  
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003  
Connecting over TCP/IP Network  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows Server 2003  
Setting up the LPR  
printer connection  
This equipment allows you to connect using LPR which is available for Windows NT 4.0, Win-  
dows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. If you use Windows NT 4.0, Windows  
2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, LPR printing may be most suitable.  
P.66 "Installing the Client Software for LPR Printing"  
SUPPLEMENT:  
NOTE:  
•
To print with a LPR connection, this equipment must be configured to enable LPD  
Print Service. Ask your administrator if the LPD Print Service is enabled.  
SMB Printing  
•
SMB printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed.  
Available for:  
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
Windows Server 2003  
Network Environment over TCP/IP  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows Server 2003  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Setting up SMB Printer  
Connection  
Windows Server 2003  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows Server 2003  
22  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
This equipment can be used with an SMB printer connection that allows you to connect to this  
equipment using File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks service. SMB printing is the  
common method used to set up the printer. However, SMB printing is not suitable for printing a  
large amount of documents.  
P.89 "Installing the Client Software for SMB Printing".  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
•
It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT  
4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is  
recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further informa-  
tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Adminis-  
trator’s Guide.  
Using Peer-to-Peer Utility  
•
Peer-to-Peer printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed.  
Available for:  
Windows 98, Windows Me  
Connecting over TCP/IP Network  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Setting up the TCP/IP  
printer connection with  
Peer-to-Peer Utility  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
The Peer-to-Peer Utility allows you to create the peer-to-peer printer connection port by search-  
ing this equipment in your network. When your network does not allow Windows shared printer  
service, or you cannot see this equipment in your network because it is in another subnet, this  
will help you to find the system and create a printer connection.  
P.118 "Installing the Client Software for Peer-to-Peer Printing".  
— Internet Connection  
Available for:  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
23  
     
Connecting over Internet  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows Server 2003  
Setting up the IPP  
printer connection  
If you print to this equipment over the Internet, you can use IPP printing under Windows 2000,  
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. This allows you to print to this equipment from any-  
where on the Internet.  
P.127 "Installing the Client Software for IPP Printing"  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
To print with an IPP connection, this equipment must be configured to enable the  
IPP Print Service and must be connected to the Internet. Ask your administrator if  
the IPP Print Service is enabled.  
You can also perform Email printing over the Internet. For more information about  
Email printing, please refer to following section.  
P.325 "Email Printing"  
— Novell Printing  
NOTE:  
•
Novell printing is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed.  
Available for:  
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
Windows Server 2003  
Connecting with a NetWare Environment over TCP/IP or IPX/SPX Network  
NetWare 4.x  
NetWare 5.x  
NetWare 6.x  
Setting up the Novell  
printer connection  
Setting up the SMB  
printer connection  
to Novell print queue  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows Server 2003  
24  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
When this equipment is configured to manage printing with NetWare 4.x, or 5.x over TCP/IP or  
IPX/SPX, you can print through the NetWare print server from Windows 98/Me, Windows NT  
4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. In this case, install the printer  
driver and set up the SMB printer connection to a print queue created in the NetWare server.  
P.132 "Installing the Client Software for Novell Printing"  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
To print with a Novell connection, the NetWare server must be configured for print-  
ing and this equipment must be configured to enable NetWare Print Service.  
Installing the Client Software for Parallel Printing  
This section describes how to install the client software when this equipment is connected with a  
printer cable.  
There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for parallel printing:  
•
Using the installer in the Client1 CD-ROM  
When you insert the Client1 CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer automatically  
starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer. If you  
want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this method is convenient.  
P.25 "Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer"  
•
Using Plug and Play  
When this equipment is connected to a parallel port of Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows  
2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 computers, the Plug and Play Wizard auto-  
matically starts. While you can install a printer driver using this method, other client soft-  
ware cannot be installed.  
P.31 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play"  
•
Using Add Printer Wizard  
When you want to install different printer drivers after installing a printer driver using Plug  
and Play, or when you want to install the printer drivers without using the installer or Plug  
and Play, install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard.  
P.40 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard"  
NOTE:  
•
Parallel printing is available only when the Parallel Interface is installed.  
Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer  
Installing the client software for parallel printing  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when other  
versions of Windows used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
1. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language  
dialog box appears.  
•
If the installer does not automatically start, double-click “Setup.exe” in  
the Client1 CD-ROM.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
25  
     
2. Select your language and click [OK].  
•
The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
•
The License Agreement screen is displayed.  
4. Click [Yes].  
•
The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed.  
26  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
5. Click [Next].  
•
•
If you want to change the location where the programs are installed,  
click [Browse]. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and  
click [OK].  
The Setup Type screen is displayed.  
6. Select “Custom” and click [Next].  
•
The Select Components screen is displayed.  
7. Check the software that you want to install and click [Next].  
— For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
27  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c — Check this to install the PCL5c  
printer driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
Agfa TrueType Fonts — Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts.  
— For e-STUDIO450 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
— For e-STUDIO280 Series  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO280 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO280 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
•
The Select Port dialog box appears.  
28  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
NOTE:  
•
The TopAccessDocMon is not available for parallel printing. Do not check this item.  
However, when this equipment and your computer are connected to the TCP/IP  
local area network and this equipment is connected to the parallel port of your com-  
puter, you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
•
The PCL5c printer driver is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
•
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the  
Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
8. Make sure “LPT1:” is displayed in the “Network path or  
queue name” field and click [Next].  
•
The Select Program Folder screen is displayed.  
9. Click [Next].  
•
•
If you want to change the program folder, rename the folder in the  
“Program Folders” field.  
The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
29  
10. Click [Next].  
•
•
If any printer drivers have been installed on your computer, the confir-  
mation message appears. Continue to next step.  
If no printer driver has been installed on your computer, it starts copy-  
ing files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed  
when copying is completed. Skip to Step 12.  
11. If the following message appears, click [Yes] to set the indi-  
cated printer driver to be the default printer driver, or click  
[No] to not change the default printer driver.  
12. Click [Finish].  
•
If you selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation, the  
system may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and  
launch TopAccessDocMon.  
NOTE:  
•
The Installer may ask you to restart your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to  
restart my computer now.” and click [Finish] to restart your computer.  
13. The installation is completed.  
30  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play  
The procedure to install the printer driver for Parallel printing by Plug and Play differs depend-  
ing on the version of the Windows being used.  
P.31 "Windows 98/Me"  
P.34 "Windows 2000"  
P.37 "Windows XP/Server 2003"  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is only connected using  
the printer cable. However, when this equipment and your computer are connected  
to the local area network as well as this equipment is connected to the parallel port  
of your computer, you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs. To  
install TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
NOTE:  
•
The Plug and Play function is not supported in the Windows NT 4.0.  
— Windows 98/Me  
Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play  
The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same when Win-  
dows Me is used.  
1. Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com-  
puter, and then power on the equipment and your computer.  
•
The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
31  
     
3. Select "Search for the best driver for your device. (Recom-  
mended)" and click [Next].  
4. Select “Specify a location” and click [Browse].  
•
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.  
5. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
6. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/  
Me is located and click [OK].  
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".  
32  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
•
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PS\<language>".  
7. Click [Next].  
8. Click [Next].  
9. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
33  
10. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].  
•
Start copying files.  
11. Click [Finish].  
12. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows 2000  
Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows 2000.  
1. Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com-  
puter, and then power on the equipment and your computer.  
•
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.  
34  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
2. Click [Next].  
3. Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recom-  
mended)" and click [Next].  
4. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
5. Select only “Specify a location” and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
35  
6. Click [Browse].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
7. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows  
2000 is located, select a INF file, and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
8. Click [OK].  
36  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
9. Check [Next].  
•
It starts copying files.  
10. Click [Finish].  
11. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows XP/Server 2003  
Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.  
1. Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com-  
puter, and then power on the equipment and your computer.  
•
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
37  
 
2. Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)" and  
click [Next].  
3. Select “Search for the best driver in these locations.” and  
check only the “Include this location in the search” check  
box. Then click [Browse].  
•
The Browse For Folder dialog box appears.  
4. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
38  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
5. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows XP/  
Server 2003 is located and click [OK].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
6. Click [Next].  
•
It starts copying files.  
7. Click [Finish].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
39  
8. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The procedure to install the printer driver for Parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard differs  
depending on the version of the Windows being used.  
P.40 "Windows 98/Me"  
P.44 "Windows NT 4.0"  
P.48 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is only connected using  
the printer cable. However, when this equipment and your computer are connected  
to the local area network as well as this equipment is connected to the parallel port  
of your computer, you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs. To  
install TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
— Windows 98/Me  
Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same when Win-  
dows Me is used.  
1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the  
Printers folder.  
40  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
4. Select “Local printer” and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
41  
5. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
6. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Open dialog box appears.  
7. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
8. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/  
Me is located and click [OK].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PS\<language>".  
42  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
9. Click [OK].  
10. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
11. Select “LPT1:” and click [Next].  
12. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
43  
13. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].  
•
Start copying files.  
14. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows NT 4.0  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power  
Users” privilege.  
Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the  
Printers folder.  
44  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].  
4. Select “LPT1:” and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
45  
5. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
6. Click [Browse...].  
•
The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.  
7. Click [Cancel].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
8. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
9. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT  
4.0 is located and click [Open].  
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL5C\<language>".  
46  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
•
•
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PS\<language>".  
10. Click [OK].  
11. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
12. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
47  
13. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer driv-  
ers that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat  
the procedure from Step 5 to 11 to install the printer drivers for selected operating  
systems.  
14. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].  
15. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.  
48  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows 2000)  
or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server 2003).  
•
The Printers folder is opened.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
•
When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the  
Printer Tasks menu.  
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
49  
4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect and  
install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].  
5. Select “Use the following port” and select “LPT1:”. Then  
click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
50  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
7. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
8. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
9. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows  
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
10. Click [OK].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
51  
11. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
12. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
13. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
52  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
14. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].  
15. Click [Finish].  
•
Start copying files.  
16. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installing the Client Software for USB Printing  
This section describes how to set up the printer drivers when this equipment is connected with  
USB cable.  
To set up the printer drivers for USB printing, you must install the printer drivers by Plug and  
Play functions instead of installing the client software using the installer in the Client1  
CD-ROM.  
When this equipment is connected to a USB port of Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,  
Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 computers, the Plug and Play Wizard automatically  
starts. You can install a printer driver using this method but other client software cannot be  
installed.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
53  
   
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is connected using only  
the USB cable. However, when this equipment and your computer are connected to  
the local area network and this equipment is connected to the USB port of your  
computer, you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs. To install  
TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
NOTE:  
•
USB printing is not supported in the Windows NT 4.0.  
Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play  
The procedure to install the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play differs depending  
on the version of Windows used.  
P.54 "Windows 98/Me"  
P.60 "Windows 2000"  
P.63 "Windows XP/Server 2003"  
— Windows 98/Me  
Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play  
The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same when Win-  
dows Me is used.  
1. Power on this equipment and your computer.  
2. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
3. Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your computer.  
•
The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.  
NOTE:  
•
When you are installing the printer driver for USB printing on Windows Me, the USB  
port driver automatically installed. In that case, please skip to step 11.  
54  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
     
4. Click [Next].  
5. Select “Search for the best driver for your device (Recom-  
mended)” and click [Next].  
6. Check only the “Specify a location” check box and click  
[Browse].  
•
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
55  
7. Select the “USB” folder in the Client1 CD-ROM and click [OK].  
8. Click [Next].  
9. Click [Next].  
•
It starts copying files.  
56  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
10. Click [Finish].  
•
The USB printer port driver is installed and the Add New Hardware  
Wizard dialog box appears again.  
11. Click [Next].  
12. Select "Search for the best driver for your device (Recom-  
mended)" and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
57  
13. Check only the “Specify a location” check box and click  
[Browse].  
•
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.  
14. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/  
Me is located and click [OK].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PS\<language>".  
15. Click [Next].  
58  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
16. Click [Next].  
17. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].  
•
Start copying files.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
59  
19. Click [Finish].  
20. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows 2000  
Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows 2000.  
1. Power on this equipment and your computer.  
2. Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your computer.  
•
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
60  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
4. Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recom-  
mended)" and click [Next].  
5. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
6. Select only “Specify a location” and click [Next].  
7. Click [Browse].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
61  
8. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows  
2000 is located, select a INF file, and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
9. Click [OK].  
10. Check [Next].  
•
It starts copying files.  
62  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
11. Click [Finish].  
12. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows XP/Server 2003  
Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play  
The following describes an installation on Windows XP. The procedure is the same when Win-  
dows Server 2003 is used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.  
1. Power on this equipment and your computer.  
2. Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your computer.  
•
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
63  
 
3. Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)" and  
click [Next].  
4. Select “Search for the best driver in these locations.” and  
check only the “Include this location in the search” check  
box. Then click [Browse].  
•
The Browse For Folder dialog box appears.  
5. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
64  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
6. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows XP/  
Server 2003 is located and click [OK].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
7. Click [Next].  
•
It starts copying files.  
8. Click [Finish].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
65  
9. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installing the Client Software for LPR Printing  
This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for LPR printing which is available for  
the local area network over TCP/IP.  
There are Two ways to set up the printer drivers for LPR printing:  
•
Using the installer in the Client1 CD-ROM  
You can set up the printer drivers for LPR printing by installing the printer drivers using the  
installer in the Client1 CD-ROM. Then you install and configure the LPR port to configure  
the connection.  
P.66 "Installation for LPR Printing Using the Installer"  
•
Using Add Printer Wizard  
When you want to install the printer drivers without using the installer, or when you want to  
install the same printer driver for another equipment, install the printer drivers using the Add  
Printer Wizard.  
P.74 "Installation for LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard"  
PREPARATION:  
NOTES:  
•
•
Before operating the following setup, check with your system administrator to make  
sure of the following:  
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.  
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.  
LPR Printing is only available for Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
and Windows Server 2003.  
Installation for LPR Printing Using the Installer  
Install the client software using the installer in the Client1 CD-ROM first, then configure the  
LPR port in each printer driver.  
The procedure to configure the LPR port differs depending on the version of Windows used.  
P.66 "Windows NT 4.0"  
P.69 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
— Windows NT 4.0  
Configuring the LPR port for Windows NT 4.0  
1. Install the client software using the installer in the Client1  
CD-ROM.  
66  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
       
•
Please install the client software following the instruction of the instal-  
lation for parallel printing.  
P.25 "Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer"  
2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-  
tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.  
3. Select the e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or  
e-STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select [Properties] in  
the [File] menu.  
•
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
4. Display the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].  
•
The Printer Ports dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
67  
5. Select “LPR Port” and click [New Port...].  
•
The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears.  
NOTE:  
•
If “LPR Port” is not listed, make sure the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed on your  
Windows NT 4.0. “LPR Port” is not listed unless the TCP/IP Printing Service is  
installed.  
6. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Name or  
address of server providing lpd” field and “Print” in the  
“Name of printer or print queue on that server” field, and click  
[OK].  
•
When your network uses DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name  
of this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Name or  
address of server providing lpd” field.  
7. Click [Close] to close the Printer Ports dialog box.  
68  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
8. Make sure the created LPR port is checked in the “Print to the  
following port” list and click [OK] to save settings.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
Configuring the LPR port for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.  
1. Install the client software using the installer in the Client1  
CD-ROM.  
•
Please install the client software following the instruction of the instal-  
lation for parallel printing.  
P.25 "Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer"  
2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-  
tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
69  
 
•
If you are using the Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, click  
[Start] and [Printers and Faxes] to open the Printers and Faxes folder.  
3. Select the e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or  
e-STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select [Properties] in  
the [File] menu.  
•
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
4. Display the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].  
•
The Printer Ports dialog box appears.  
5. Select “Standard TCP/IP Port” and click [New Port...].  
•
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
70  
6. Click [Next].  
7. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Printer Name  
or IP Address” field and click [Next].  
•
•
If your network uses a DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of  
this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Printer Name or IP  
Address” field.  
In the “Port Name” field, the port name is automatically entered  
according to the IP address or DNS name entered in the “Printer  
Name or IP Address” field.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
71  
8. Select “Custom” and click [Settings...].  
•
The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box appears.  
9. Select “LPR” at the “Protocol” option, enter “Print” in the  
“Queue Name” field at the “LPR Settings” option, and then  
click [OK].  
•
The screen returns to the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard  
dialog box.  
72  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If an administrator has enabled the Raw TCP printing on this equipment, you can  
set up Raw TCP printing as well. When you want to set up Raw TCP printing, select  
“Raw” at the “Protocol” option, and enter “9100” in the “Port Number” field at the  
Raw Settings” option.  
10. Click [Next].  
11. Click [Finish].  
•
The screen returns to the Printer Ports dialog box.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
73  
12. Click [Close] to close the Printer Ports dialog box.  
13. Make sure the created LPR port is checked in the “Print to the  
following port” list and click [Close].  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installation for LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The procedure to install the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard differs  
depending on the version of the Windows being used.  
P.75 "Windows NT 4.0"  
P.80 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is also available for LPR printing. To install TopAccessDocMon,  
you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
74  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
— Windows NT 4.0  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power  
Users” privilege.  
Installing the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the  
Printers folder.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
75  
 
4. Click [Add Port...].  
•
The Printer Ports dialog box appears.  
5. Select “LPR Port” and click [New Port...].  
•
The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears.  
NOTE:  
•
If “LPR Port” is not listed, make sure the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed on your  
Windows NT 4.0. “LPR Port” is not listed unless the TCP/IP Printing Service is  
installed.  
6. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Name or  
address of server providing lpd” field and “Print” in the  
“Name of printer or print queue on that server” field, and click  
[OK].  
•
When your network uses DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name  
of this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Name or  
address of server providing lpd” field.  
76  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
7. Click [Close] to close the Printer Ports dialog box.  
8. Make sure that the created LPR Port is selected in the “Avail-  
able ports” list and click [Next].  
9. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
10. Click [Browse...].  
•
The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
77  
11. Click [Cancel].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
12. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
13. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT  
4.0 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PS\<language>".  
14. Click [OK].  
78  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
15. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
16. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
79  
17. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer driv-  
ers that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat  
the procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating  
systems.  
18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].  
19. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.  
80  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
Installing the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows 2000)  
or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server 2003).  
•
The Printers folder is opened.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
•
When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the  
Printer Tasks menu.  
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
81  
4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect and  
install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].  
5. Select “Create a new port” and select “Standard TCP/IP Port”  
in the “Type” drop down box. Then click [Next].  
•
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.  
6. Click [Next].  
82  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
7. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Printer Name  
or IP Address” field and click [Next].  
•
•
If your network uses a DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of  
this equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Printer Name or IP  
Address” field.  
In the “Port Name” field, the port name is automatically entered  
according to the IP address or DNS name entered in the “Printer  
Name or IP Address” field.  
8. Select “Custom” and click [Settings...].  
•
The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
83  
9. Select “LPR” at the “Protocol” option, enter “Print” in the  
“Queue Name” field at the “LPR Settings” option, and then  
click [OK].  
•
The screen returns to the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard  
dialog box.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If an administrator has enabled the Raw TCP printing on this equipment, you can  
set up Raw TCP printing as well. When you want to set up Raw TCP printing, select  
“Raw” at the “Protocol” option, and enter “9100” in the “Port Number” field at the  
Raw Settings” option.  
84  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
10. Click [Next].  
11. Click [Finish].  
12. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
85  
13. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
14. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
15. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows  
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
16. Click [OK].  
86  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
17. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
18. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
87  
19. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
20. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].  
21. Click [Finish].  
•
Start copying files.  
22. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
88  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
Installing the Client Software for SMB Printing  
This section describes how to set up the client software for SMB printing which is available for  
the local area network over TCP/IP.  
There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for SMB printing:  
•
Using the installer in the Client1 CD-ROM  
When you insert the Client1 CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer automatically  
starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer. If you  
want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this method is convenient.  
P.89 "Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer"  
•
Using Point and Print  
You can install the printer driver by double-clicking network queues on the system. By this  
method, printer drivers can be downloaded from the system so that the Client1 CD-ROM is  
not required. However, other client software cannot be installed using this method.  
P.100 "Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print"  
•
Using Add Printer Wizard  
When you want to install the printer drivers without connecting to the equipment using Point  
and Print, install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard.  
P.104 "Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard"  
PREPARATION:  
•
Before installing the printer driver for SMB printing, check with your system adminis-  
trator to make sure of the following:  
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.  
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.  
Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer  
You can install the client software and set up the SMB printing using the installer in the Client1  
CD-ROM.  
NOTE:  
•
It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT  
4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is  
recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further informa-  
tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Adminis-  
trator’s Guide.  
Installing the client software for SMB printing  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when other  
versions of Windows are used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
1. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language  
dialog box appears.  
•
If the installer does not automatically start, double-click “Setup.exe” in  
the Client1 CD-ROM.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
89  
     
2. Select your language and click [OK].  
•
The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
•
The License Agreement screen is displayed.  
4. Click [Yes].  
•
The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed.  
90  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
5. Click [Next].  
•
•
If you want to change the location where the programs are installed,  
click [Browse]. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and  
click [OK].  
The Setup Type screen is displayed.  
6. Select “Custom” and click [Next].  
•
The Select Components screen is displayed.  
7. Check the software that you want to install and click [Next].  
— For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
91  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c — Check this to install the PCL5c  
printer driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
Agfa TrueType Fonts — Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts.  
— For e-STUDIO450 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
— For e-STUDIO280 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO280 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO280 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
•
The Select Port dialog box appears.  
92  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
•
The PCL5c printer driver is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
•
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the  
Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
8. Click [Browse].  
•
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can also automatically specify the network queue by searching the equipment  
in the network.  
P.95 "Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port"  
9. Locate this equipment in your network, select the “print”  
queue, and click [OK].  
NOTE:  
•
Do not select “pcl5c”, “pcl6”, or “ps3” queue. These queues only accept the print job  
in each emulation. If you install several printer drivers and specify one of these  
queues, the print job may not be printed properly due to mismatch of the emulations  
between the print job and queue.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
93  
10. Click [Next].  
•
The Select Program Folder screen is displayed.  
11. Click [Next].  
•
•
If you want to change the program folder, rename the folder in the  
“Program Folders” field.  
The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed.  
12. Click [Next].  
•
If any printer drivers have been installed on your computer, the confir-  
mation message appears. Continue to next step.  
94  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
•
If no printer driver has been installed on your computer, it starts copy-  
ing files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed  
when copying is completed. Skip to Step 14.  
13. If the following message appears, click [Yes] to set the indi-  
cated printer driver to be the default printer driver, or click  
[No] to not change the default printer driver.  
14. Click [Finish].  
•
If you selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation, the  
system may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and  
launch TopAccessDocMon.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
•
The Installer may ask you to restart your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to  
restart my computer now.” and click [Finish] to restart your computer.  
15. The installation is completed.  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port  
In the Select Port screen during the installation, you can also obtain the network queue name  
automatically by searching the equipment.  
There two ways to obtain the SMB printer port from the equipment:  
P.96 "Searching the equipment automatically"  
P.98 "Specifying the IP address manually"  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
95  
 
Searching the equipment automatically  
1. Click [Discovery].  
•
The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Start Discovery].  
•
It starts searching the equipment in the network.  
96  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
It searches the equipment within the local subnet in your network. If the equipment  
is located in the different subnet from your computer, or you want to specify the IP  
address range to be searched, click [Advance]. The Discovery Settings dialog box  
appears and you can specify the advanced settings for searching the equipment.  
•
•
Devices — You can specify the device models to be searched. This sets to search the  
e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series, so you do  
not have to change this options.  
Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search — Check on this to search printers which con-  
nect to the IPX/SPX network. This is available only when the IPX/SPX protocol  
and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the computer is connected to  
the NetWare server.  
•
Network - Enable TCP/IP Search — Check on this to search printers which con-  
nect to the TCP/IP network. This is available only when the TCP/IP protocol is  
installed in your computer. When this is enabled, select how it searches printers in  
the TCP/IP network.  
Search local subnet — Select this to search printers in local subnet.  
Specify a range — Select this to search printers in specific range of IP addresses.  
When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in “From” field and “To” field to spec-  
ify the range.  
3. Select the equipment that you want to connect and click [OK].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
97  
4. It automatically obtains the network queue in the “Network  
path or queue name” field.  
NOTE:  
•
It automatically obtains the IP address of the equipment and the queue name speci-  
fied by an administrator, in the “Network path or queue name” field in the General  
submenu page of the Setup menu in the TopAccess administrator mode. If you can-  
not obtain the queue name, ask your administrator that the “Network path or queue  
name” field is correctly specified.  
5. Continue the installation from step 10 on page 94.  
Specifying the IP address manually  
1. Click [Discovery].  
•
The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.  
98  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
2. Click [Manual Selection].  
•
The Manual Selection dialog box appears.  
3. Enter each item to specify the printer address and click [OK].  
IP Address — Enter the IP address of the printer.  
IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only when  
the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the  
computer is connected to the NetWare server.  
Name — Enter the printer name.  
Location — Enter the location of the printer.  
NOTE:  
•
You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
99  
4. Select the equipment that you want to connect and click [OK].  
5. It automatically obtain the network queue in the “Network  
path or queue name” field.  
NOTE:  
•
It automatically obtains the IP address of the equipment and the queue name speci-  
fied by an administrator, in the “Network path or queue name” field in the General  
submenu page of the Setup menu in the TopAccess administrator mode. If you can-  
not obtain the queue name, ask your administrator that the “Network path or queue  
name” field is correctly specified.  
6. Continue the installation from step 10 on page 94.  
Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print  
The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Point and Print differs depending  
on the version of Windows used.  
P.101 "Windows 98/Me"  
P.103 "Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003"  
100  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
NOTE:  
•
It assumes using SMB printing by Point and Print in a small network. If you can use  
the Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a  
print server, it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For  
further information about setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Net-  
work Administrator’s Guide.  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing. To install TopAccessDocMon,  
you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
— Windows 98/Me  
Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print  
1. Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer,  
and double-click a queue in which the printer driver should  
be installed (see below).  
pcl5c — Double-click this queue to install the PCL5c printer driver.  
pcl6 — Double-click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver.  
ps3 — Double-click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver.  
•
The Printers dialog box appears.  
NOTE:  
•
The “pcl5c” queue is displayed only for e-STUDIO4511 Series.  
2. Click [Yes].  
•
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
101  
 
3. Select whether printing MS-DOS-based programs and click  
[Next].  
4. Change the name if desired, select whether you are using this  
printer as a default printer, and click [Next].  
5. Select “Yes” to print a test page and click [Finish].  
102  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
6. Make sure a test page is printed successfully and click [Yes]  
to close the dialog box.  
7. The printer driver is installed and the print queue window  
appears.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003  
Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
1. Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer,  
and double-click a queue in which the printer driver should  
be installed (see below).  
pcl5c — Double-click this queue to install the PCL5c printer driver.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
103  
 
pcl6 — Double-click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver.  
ps3 — Double-click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver.  
•
The Printers dialog box appears.  
NOTE:  
•
The “pcl5c” queue is displayed only for e-STUDIO4511 Series.  
2. Click [Yes].  
3. The printer driver is installed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard differs  
depending on the version of the Windows being used.  
P.104 "Windows 98/Me"  
P.107 "Windows NT 4.0"  
P.112 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"  
NOTE:  
•
It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT  
4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is  
recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further informa-  
tion about setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Adminis-  
trator’s Guide.  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing. To install TopAccessDocMon,  
you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
— Windows 98/Me  
Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same when Win-  
dows Me is used.  
1. Install the printer driver by Add Printer Wizard.  
104  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
•
Please install the printer driver following the instruction of the installa-  
tion for parallel printing.  
P.40 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard"  
2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-  
tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.  
3. Select the printer driver and select [Properties] in the [File]  
menu.  
•
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
105  
4. Display the [Details] tab and click [Add Port].  
•
The Add Port dialog box appears.  
5. Select “Other” and “Local Port”, and click [OK].  
•
The Port Name dialog box appears.  
6. Enter “\\<NetBIOS Name>\print” in the field and click [OK].  
Example: NetBIOS Name = MFP-00C67861  
\\MFP-00C67861\print  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name.  
Example: \\10.10.70.120\print  
106  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
7. Click [OK] to save settings.  
— Windows NT 4.0  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power  
Users” privilege.  
Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the  
Printers folder.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
107  
 
•
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].  
4. Click [Add Port...].  
•
The Printer Ports dialog box appears.  
5. Select “Local Port” and click [New Port...].  
•
The Port Name dialog box appears.  
6. Enter “\\<NetBIOS Name>\print” in the field and click [OK].  
Example: NetBIOS Name = MFP-00C67861  
\\MFP-00C67861\print  
108  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name.  
Example: \\10.10.70.120\print  
7. Click [Close].  
8. Make sure the created port is selected and click [Next].  
9. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
10. Click [Browse...].  
•
The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
109  
11. Click [Cancel].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
12. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
13. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT  
4.0 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PS\<language>".  
14. Click [OK].  
110  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
15. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
16. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
111  
17. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer driv-  
ers that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat  
the procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating  
systems.  
18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].  
19. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.  
112  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows 2000)  
or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server 2003).  
•
The Printers folder is opened.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
•
When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the  
Printer Tasks menu.  
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
113  
4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect and  
install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].  
5. Select “Create a new port” and select “Local Port” in the  
“Type” drop down box. Then click [Next].  
•
The Port Name dialog box appears.  
6. Enter “\\<NetBIOS Name>\print” in the field and click [OK].  
Example: NetBIOS Name = MFP-00C67861  
\\MFP-00C67861\print  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name.  
Example: \\10.10.70.120\print  
114  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
7. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
8. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
9. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
10. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows  
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
115  
•
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
11. Click [OK].  
12. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
116  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
13. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
14. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
15. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
117  
16. Click [Finish].  
•
Start copying files.  
17. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installing the Client Software for Peer-to-Peer Printing  
This section describes how to set up the client software for Peer-to-Peer printing which is avail-  
able for the local area network over TCP/IP.  
You can set up the printer drivers for Peer-to-Peer printing by installing the printer drivers using  
the installer in the Client1 CD-ROM. Then you install and configure the peer-to-peer port using  
the Peer-to-Peer utility to configure the connection.  
PREPARATION:  
NOTE:  
•
Before operating the following setup, check with your system administrator to make  
sure of the following:  
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.  
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.  
•
Peer-to-Peer printing is only available for Windows 98 and Windows Me.  
Installation and Configuration of Peer-to-Peer Utility  
Install the printer driver using the installer in the Client1 CD-ROM first, then install the  
Peer-to-Peer utility to configure the peer-to-peer port.  
Installing the Peer-to-Peer utility  
1. Install the client software using the installer in the Client1  
CD-ROM.  
•
Please install the client software following the instruction of the instal-  
lation for parallel printing.  
P.25 "Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer"  
118  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
     
NOTE:  
•
TopAccessDocMon cannot be used when you configure the printer connection  
using the Peer-to-Peer utility. Please uncheck the TopAccessDocMon in the Select  
Components screen during the installation. If TopAccessDocMon has been  
installed, uninstall it before installing the Peer-to-Peer utility.  
2. After installing the client software, double-click the  
“Setup.exe” in the “PtoP” folder in the Client1 CD-ROM.  
•
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.  
NOTE:  
•
The message “Setup has completed configuring the Windows Installer on your sys-  
tem. The system needs to be restarted in order to continue with the installation.  
Please click Restart to reboot the system.” will appear and it will automatically install  
the Windows Installer if the proper version of Windows Installer is not installed. If  
this message appears, click [Restart] to reboot your computer. After rebooting the  
computer, the InstallShield Wizard dialog box automatically appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
119  
3. Click [Next].  
•
The Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed.  
4. Click [Install].  
•
The Destination Folder screen is displayed.  
5. Click [Next].  
120  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
•
•
If you want to change the location where the programs are installed,  
click [Change]. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and  
click [OK].  
The Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed.  
6. Click [Install].  
•
Starts copying files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is  
displayed when copying is completed.  
7. Click [Finish].  
•
The IP-PeerToPeer Setup Version 3.12 dialog box appears.  
8. Continue to set up the peer-to-peer port.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
121  
You can search the printer in the network to create the peer-to-peer port, or you  
can enter the IP address of the printer to create the peer-to-peer port.  
P.122 "Configuring the peer-to-peer port by searching a printer"  
P.124 "Configuring the peer-to-peer port by entering IP address manually"  
Configuring the peer-to-peer port by searching a printer  
You can configure the peer-to-peer port by searching a printer.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If you cannot find this equipment, try to create a peer-to-peer port by entering the  
printer’s IP address manually.  
P.124 "Configuring the peer-to-peer port by entering IP address manually"  
1. Click [Find Printers] to search this equipment in your net-  
work.  
•
The system displays the found equipment in the “Available Printers”  
list.  
NOTE:  
•
•
If this equipment cannot be found, you can change the number of hops to be  
searched at the “Number of hops” field and try again. For more information about  
specifying the number of hops, please see the Online Help for the Peer-to-Peer util-  
ity.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
If the IP-PeerToPeer Setup Version 3.12 dialog box does not appear, click [Start],  
and select [IP-P2P] in the “IP-P2P” folder in the “Programs” folder.  
122  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
2. Make sure “S” is displayed in the “Flags” column for this  
equipment to be connected. If not, select this equipment and  
click [Select] to display “S” in the “Flags” column.  
3. Click [OK].  
4. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the  
Printers folder.  
5. Select the e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or  
e-STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select [Properties] in  
the [File] menu.  
•
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
123  
6. Display the [Details] tab.  
7. Select the created peer-to-peer port in the “Print to the follow-  
ing port” drop down box.  
8. Click [OK] to save settings.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Configuring the peer-to-peer port by entering IP address manually  
You can configure the peer-to-peer port by entering the IP address of this equipment manually.  
1. Click [Add].  
•
The Add Printer dialog box appears.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If the IP-PeerToPeer Setup Version 3.12 dialog box does not appear, click [Start],  
and select [IP-P2P] in the “IP-P2P” folder in the “Programs” folder.  
124  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
2. Enter the items described blow.  
Unit Name — Enter the name of the port to be created.  
IP Address — Enter the IP address of this equipment.  
Port — “10001” is entered in this field as the default. However, you must change  
it to a port number that is entered for the port number of the Raw TCP Print set-  
ting in the Print Server page in TopAccess administrator mode.  
Description — Enter the comment if required.  
3. Click [OK].  
•
The entered printer information is added to the “Available Printers”  
list.  
4. Make sure “S” is displayed in the “Flags” column for this  
equipment to be connected. If not, select this equipment and  
click [Select] to display “S” in the “Flags” column.  
5. Click [OK].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
125  
6. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the  
Printers folder.  
7. Select the e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or  
e-STUDIO280 Series printer driver and select [Properties] in  
the [File] menu.  
•
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
8. Display the [Details] tab.  
126  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
9. Select the created peer-to-peer port in the “Print to the follow-  
ing port” drop down box.  
10. Click [OK] to save settings.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installing the Client Software for IPP Printing  
This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for IPP printing which is available for  
Internet connection.  
To set up the printer drivers for IPP printing, install the printer drivers by Add Printer Wizard,  
and then install the other software that you require.  
PREPARATION:  
NOTE:  
•
•
Before installing the printer driver for IPP printing, check with your system adminis-  
trator to make sure of the following:  
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.  
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.  
IPP Printing is only available for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server  
2003.  
Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard  
Installing the printer driver for IPP printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
127  
     
1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows 2000)  
or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server 2003).  
•
The Printers folder is opened.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printers] icon.  
•
•
When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the  
Printer Tasks menu.  
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
128  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
4. Select “Network printer” and click [Next].  
5. Select “Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intra-  
net”, and enter “http://[IP address]:631/Print” in the “URL”  
field.  
•
•
Enter the IP address of this equipment instead of [IP address].  
Example: IP address = 10.10.70.105  
http://10.10.70.105:631/Print  
If your network uses a DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of  
this equipment provided from DNS or WINS instead of [IP address].  
Example: Print Server Name = Mfp-00c67861  
http://Mfp-00c67861:631/Print  
•
When you connect from the Internet, enter the FQDN of this equip-  
ment provided from DNS instead of [IP address].  
Example: URL = mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com  
http://mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com:631/Print  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If an administrator has enabled the IPP Port80 Enabled option on this equipment,  
you can exclude the port number from the URL. (i.e. “http://192.168.255.48/Print”)  
6. Click [Next].  
•
The Connect to Printer dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
129  
7. Click [OK].  
8. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
9. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
10. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
11. Locate the directory where the printer driver for your Win-  
dows version is located, select the INF file, and click [Open].  
130  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003,  
locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003,  
locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003,  
locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
12. Click [OK].  
13. Select the printer driver and click [OK].  
•
•
If any other printer driver(s) had already been installed on your com-  
puter, the Default Printer screen is displayed. Continue to next step.  
If no printer driver had been installed on your computer, the complete  
screen is displayed. Skip to step 15.  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
131  
14. Select whether using this printer as a default printer and click  
[Next].  
15. Click [Finish].  
•
The printer driver is installed.  
NOTE:  
•
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
SUPPLEMENT:  
If you want to install TopAccessDocmon and Agfa Font Manager, you must install it  
from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
Installing the Client Software for Novell Printing  
This section describes how to install the client software for Novell printing on NetWare print  
server environments.  
There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for Novell printing:  
•
Using the installer in the Client1 CD-ROM  
132  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
When you insert the Client1 CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer automatically  
starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer. If you  
want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this method is convenient.  
P.133 "Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer"  
•
Using Point and Print  
You can install the printer driver by double-clicking network queues on the NetWare. If the  
NetWare has been set up for NDPS, printer drivers can be downloaded from the system so  
that the Client1 CD-ROM is not required. However, other client software cannot be installed  
using this method.  
P.140 "Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print"  
•
Using Add Printer Wizard  
When you want to install the printer drivers without connecting to the equipment using Point  
and Print, install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard.  
P.148 "Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard"  
PREPARATIONS:  
•
Before installing the printer driver for Novell printing, check with your system admin-  
istrator to make sure of the following:  
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.  
- The NetWare server is configured correctly and running on your network.  
- The IPX/SPX or TCP/IP, and NetWare settings are correct on this equipment.  
Before installing the client software for Novell printing, please make sure following network  
services and protocols are installed on your computer:  
„
„
„
Windows 98/ME  
•
•
TCP/IP protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the TCP/IP network.)  
IPX/SPX-compatible protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the IPX/SPX  
network.)  
•
•
Client for NetWare Network  
Service for NetWare Directory Service (Required only when using the NetWare server in  
NDS mode.)  
Windows NT 4.0  
•
•
TCP/IP protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the TCP/IP network.)  
NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible Transport protocol (Required only when using the Net-  
Ware in the IPX/SPX network.)  
•
NWLink NetBIOS protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the IPX/SPX  
network.)  
•
Gateway (and Client) Services for NetWare  
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
•
NWLink IPX/SPX/NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol (Required only when using  
the NetWare in the IPX/SPX network.)  
•
Gateway (and Client) Services for NetWare  
Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer  
You can install the client software and set up the Novell printing using the installer in the Client1  
CD-ROM.  
Installing the client software for Novell printing using the installer  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
133  
 
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
other versions of Windows are used.  
REQUIREMENTS:  
•
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
You have an appropriate privilege to access the NetWare server.  
1. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language  
dialog box appears.  
•
If the installer does not automatically start, double-click “Setup.exe” in  
the Client1 CD-ROM.  
2. Select your language and click [OK].  
•
The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
•
The License Agreement screen is displayed.  
134  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
4. Click [Yes].  
•
The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed.  
5. Click [Next].  
•
•
If you want to change the location where the programs are installed,  
click [Browse]. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and  
click [OK].  
The Setup Type screen is displayed.  
6. Select “Custom” and click [Next].  
•
The Select Components screen is displayed.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
135  
7. Check the software that you want to install and click [Next].  
— For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PCL5c — Check this to install the PCL5c  
printer driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
Agfa TrueType Fonts — Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts.  
— For e-STUDIO450 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
136  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
— For e-STUDIO280 Series:  
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO280 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO280 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer  
driver.  
•
The Select Port dialog box appears.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
•
•
The PCL5c printer driver is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the  
Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
137  
8. Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net-  
Ware file server in the “Network path or queue name” field,  
and click [Next].  
If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, enter as the following in  
the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>  
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_00c67861  
\\Nwsrv\mfp_00c67861  
If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, enter as the follow-  
ing in the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<Tree>\.<queue name>.<Context>.<Tree>  
Example: Tree=ORG, queue name=mfp_00c67861, Context=Dept1  
\\Org\.mfp_00c67861.dept1.org  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator. If you do not  
know the queue for this equipment, ask your administrator.  
138  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
9. Click [Next].  
•
•
If you want to change the program folder, rename the folder in the  
“Program Folders” field.  
The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed.  
10. Click [Next].  
•
•
If any printer drivers have been installed on your computer, the confir-  
mation message appears. Continue to next step.  
If no printer driver has been installed on your computer, it starts copy-  
ing files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed  
when copying is completed. Skip to Step 12.  
11. If the following message appears, click [Yes] to set the indi-  
cated printer driver to be the default printer driver, or click  
[No] to not change the default printer driver.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
139  
12. Click [Finish].  
•
If you selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation, the  
system may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and  
launch TopAccessDocMon.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
•
The Installer may ask you to restart your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to  
restart my computer now.” and click [Finish] to restart your computer.  
13. The installation is completed.  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print  
The procedure to install the printer driver for Novell printing by Point and Print differs depend-  
ing on the version of Windows used.  
P.141 "Windows 98/Me"  
P.145 "Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003"  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is also available for Novell printing. To install TopAccessDoc-  
Mon, you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
140  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
— Windows 98/Me  
Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print  
1. Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network  
with Windows Explorer, and double-click a queue.  
When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, open the NetWare file  
server and double-click the queue for the equipment.  
When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, browse the  
NDS tree and context, and double-click the queue for the equipment.  
•
The Printers dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Yes].  
•
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
141  
 
3. Select whether printing MS-DOS-based programs and click  
[Next].  
•
•
When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for  
each Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the printer  
driver is automatically installed. Skip to Step 10.  
Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each  
Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the Add Printer  
Wizard dialog box appears. Continue to the next step.  
4. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
5. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Open dialog box appears.  
6. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
142  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
7. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/  
Me is located and click [OK].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\9X_ME\PS\<language>".  
8. Click [OK].  
9. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
143  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
10. Change the name if desired, select whether you are using this  
printer as a default printer, and click [Next].  
11. Select “Yes” to print a test page and click [Finish].  
12. The printer driver is installed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
144  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
— Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003  
Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
1. Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network  
with Windows Explorer, and double-click a queue.  
When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, open the NetWare file  
server and double-click the queue for the equipment.  
When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, browse the  
NDS tree and context, and double-click the queue for the equipment.  
•
The Printers dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Yes].  
•
When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for  
each Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the printer  
driver is automatically installed.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
145  
 
•
Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each  
Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the Add Printer  
Wizard dialog box appears. Continue to the next step.  
3. Click [OK].  
4. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
5. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
6. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
146  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
7. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows  
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
8. Click [OK].  
9. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
10. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
147  
Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The procedure to install the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard differs  
depending on the version of the Windows being used.  
P.148 "Windows 98/Me"  
P.151 "Windows NT 4.0"  
P.156 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon is also available for Novell printing. To install TopAccessDoc-  
Mon, you must install it from the Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts  
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the  
Client1 CD-ROM separately.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Agfa Font Manager is not included in the Client1 CD-ROM. You must install it from the Font  
CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
— Windows 98/Me  
Installing the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard  
The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same when Win-  
dows Me is used.  
1. Install the printer driver by Add Printer Wizard.  
•
Please install the printer driver following the instruction of the installa-  
tion for parallel printing.  
P.40 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard"  
2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-  
tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.  
148  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
   
3. Select the printer driver and select [Properties] in the [File]  
menu.  
•
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
4. Display the [Details] tab and click [Add Port].  
•
The Add Port dialog box appears.  
5. Select “Other” and “Local Port”, and click [OK].  
•
The Port Name dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
149  
6. Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net-  
Ware file server in the “Enter a port name” field, and click  
[OK].  
If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, enter as the following in  
the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>  
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_00c67861  
\\Nwsrv\mfp_00c67861  
If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, enter as the follow-  
ing in the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<Tree>\.<queue name>.<Context>.<Tree>  
Example: Tree=ORG, queue name=mfp_00c67861, Context=Dept1  
\\Org\.mfp_00c67861.dept1.org  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator. If you do not  
know the queue for this equipment, ask your administrator.  
7. Click [OK] to save settings.  
150  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
— Windows NT 4.0  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power  
Users” privilege.  
Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the  
Printers folder.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
151  
 
4. Click [Add Port...].  
•
The Printer Ports dialog box appears.  
5. Select “Local Port” and click [New Port...].  
•
The Port Name dialog box appears.  
6. Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net-  
Ware file server in the “Enter a port name” field, and click  
[OK].  
If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, enter as the following in  
the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>  
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_00c67861  
\\Nwsrv\mfp_00c67861  
If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, enter as the follow-  
ing in the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<Tree>\.<queue name>.<Context>.<Tree>  
Example: Tree=ORG, queue name=mfp_00c67861, Context=Dept1  
\\Org\.mfp_00c67861.dept1.org  
152  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator. If you do not  
know the queue for this equipment, ask your administrator.  
7. Click [Close].  
8. Make sure the created port is selected and click [Next].  
9. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
10. Click [Browse...].  
•
The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
153  
11. Click [Cancel].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
12. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
13. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT  
4.0 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\NT\PS\<language>".  
14. Click [OK].  
154  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
15. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
16. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
155  
17. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer driv-  
ers that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat  
the procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating  
systems.  
18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].  
19. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.  
156  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
 
Installing the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard  
1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows 2000)  
or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server 2003).  
•
The Printers folder is opened.  
2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.  
•
•
When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the  
Printer Tasks menu.  
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
157  
4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect and  
install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].  
5. Select “Create a new port” and select “Local Port” in the  
“Type” drop down box. Then click [Next].  
•
The Port Name dialog box appears.  
158  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
6. Enter the network queue name that was created on the Net-  
Ware file server in the “Enter a port name” field, and click  
[OK].  
If the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, enter as the following in  
the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>  
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_00c67861  
\\Nwsrv\mfp_00c67861  
If the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, enter as the follow-  
ing in the “Network path or queue name” field:  
\\<Tree>\.<queue name>.<Context>.<Tree>  
Example: Tree=ORG, queue name=mfp_00c67861, Context=Dept1  
\\Org\.mfp_00c67861.dept1.org  
7. Click [Have Disk...].  
•
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.  
8. Click [Browse...].  
•
The Locate File dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
159  
9. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
•
When inserting the Client1 CD-ROM, the installer may automatically  
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.  
10. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows  
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].  
•
•
•
To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5C\<language>".  
To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".  
To install the PS3 printer driver, locate  
"[CD-ROM drive]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".  
11. Click [OK].  
12. Select the printer driver and click [Next].  
160  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
NOTE:  
•
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it  
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].  
13. Change the name if desired and click [Next].  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this  
printer as a default printer.  
14. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
161  
15. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].  
16. Click [Finish].  
•
Start copying files.  
17. The installation is completed.  
NOTE:  
•
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of  
the equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.  
P.204 "Before Using the Printer Driver"  
Uninstalling the Client1 Software  
The following instructions describe how to uninstall the client software. The uninstallation pro-  
cedure is different how you installed the client software.  
P.162 "When Installed Using the Installer"  
When Installed Using the Installer  
When the client software was installed using the Installer in the Client1 CD-ROM or down-  
loaded from TopAccess, you can delete all files using the Add/Remove Programs function.  
You can uninstall all client software that have installed from the Client1 CD-ROM, or you can  
uninstall only the components that you want to remove.  
P.163 "Uninstalling all Client1 Software"  
162  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
     
P.165 "Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove"  
Uninstalling all Client1 Software  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
other versions of Windows are used.  
NOTE:  
•
Before uninstalling the software, please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon.  
1. Open “Control Panel” and double-click the “Add/Remove  
Programs” icon.  
•
The Add/Remove Programs dialog box appears.  
2. Select “TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series Client”, “TOSHIBA  
e-STUDIO450 Series Client”, or “TOSHIBA e-STUDIO280  
Series Client” and click [Change/Remove].  
•
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
163  
 
3. Select “Remove” and click [Next].  
•
The Confirm Uninstall dialog box appears.  
4. Click [OK].  
5. Click [Yes] to delete the setting files.  
•
Deleting files starts.  
NOTE:  
•
If you want to re-install the client software later, click [No] to remain the setting files.  
You can restore the data and settings when you re-install the client software.  
6. Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and click  
[Finish] to restart your computer.  
•
Some files may be deleted after restarting the computer.  
164  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove  
The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
other versions of Windows are used.  
NOTE:  
•
Before uninstalling the software, please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon.  
1. Open “Control Panel” and double-click the “Add/Remove  
Programs” icon.  
•
The Add/Remove Programs dialog box appears.  
2. Select “TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Series Client”, “TOSHIBA  
e-STUDIO450 Series Client”, or “e-STUDIO280 Series Client”  
and click [Change/Remove].  
•
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
165  
 
3. Select “Modify” and click [Next].  
4. Uncheck the components that you want to uninstall and click  
[Next].  
•
Deleting files starts.  
5. Click [Finish].  
NOTE:  
•
If you select all components to be uninstalled, the Installer may ask you to restart  
your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and click  
[Finish] to restart your computer.  
166  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard  
If only printer drivers are installed by Add Printer Wizard or Point and Print, you can uninstall  
them by deleting the printer icons from the Printers folder.  
Deleting printer drivers  
1. Open “Printers” folder, select the printer icon that you want  
to delete, and press the [Delete] key.  
•
When using Windows 98/Me or Windows NT 4.0, uninstallation has  
finished.  
•
When using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, continue to the next  
step.  
2. Click the [File] menu and select [Server Properties].  
•
The Print Server Properties dialog box appears.  
3. Display the Drivers tab. Select the printer drivers that you  
want to delete, and click [Remove].  
•
The confirmation dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
167  
 
4. Click [OK].  
•
The printer drivers are completely deleted.  
168  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows  
Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
NOTE:  
•
Printing from Macintosh is available only when the Network Interface Card is  
installed.  
Please refer to following instructions for configuring printing systems on Macintosh computers.  
P.169 "About Client Software for Macintosh"  
P.169 "Planning for Installation"  
P.169 "Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"  
P.176 "Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later"  
About Client Software for Macintosh  
„
PostScript Printer Description File  
The Macintosh PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file contains information about control-  
ler-specific features. There are two PPD files provided in the Client1 CD-ROM: one is for Mac  
OS 8.6/9.x and the other is for Mac OS X.  
Information within the PPD file for Mac OS 8.6/9.x works in conjunction with the standard  
Macintosh LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8.6.5 (or later). This Macintosh PPDs are sup-  
plied for Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x and it also supports Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.  
Information within the PPD file for Mac OS X works in conjunction with the Print Center on  
Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later.  
Planning for Installation  
System Requirements  
To install the printer drivers on a Mac OS computer, the following environment is required.  
Display Resolution: 1028 x 768 dots or more  
OS:  
Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x, Mac OS X 10.1 (Classic), Mac OS X 10.2 (Classic)  
Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later  
Protocol:  
TCP/IP or AppleTalk (Ethernet)  
Printer Driver:  
LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8.6.5 or later  
(not required for Mac OS X)  
NOTE:  
•
Mac OS X 10.2 and its earlier versions of Mac OS X are supported in Classic mode  
using the PPD file for Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x. This equipment also provides the PPD file  
for Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later.  
Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x  
Installing the Macintosh PPD File  
The Macintosh PPD file that is provided in the Client1 CD-ROM can be installed by copying it  
to the System Folder: Extensions: Printer Descriptions folder.  
This PPD file supports printing from Mac OS X 8.6 or 9.x, and these operating systems running  
on the Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic Mode.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
169  
                       
Copying the PPD file to Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x  
1. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and open  
your language folder in the “MacPPD” folder.  
2. Copy the Stufflt file (.sit) to the desktop, and extract the Mac-  
intosh PPD file.  
•
The Stufflt file varies depending on the equipment.  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO4511Series.sit (for e-STUDIO4511 Series)  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO450Series.sit (for e-STUDIO450 Series)  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO280Series.sit (for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
NOTE:  
•
To extract the file, the Stufflt utility must be installed on your computer. For instruc-  
tions on how to extract the file, refer to your StuffIt documentation.  
3. Double-click the boot drive icon and open the “System  
Folder:Extensions:Printer Descriptions” folder.  
4. Select and drag the Macintosh PPD file that you extracted to  
the “Printer Descriptions” folder.  
5. Continue the procedure for configuring the printer.  
P.170 "Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"  
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x  
After you copy the PPD file to the Printer Descriptions folder in the System Folder, you can con-  
figure the printer.  
This equipment supports two types of Macintosh Printing Service: LPR Printing or AppleTalk  
Printing.  
•
LPR Printing  
When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP/IP network, you can  
enable LPR printing from Macintosh computer.  
•
AppleTalk Printing  
When this equipment and your computer are connected over AppleTalk network, you can  
enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computer.  
Configuring Macintosh LPR printing  
PREPARATION:  
•
Before installing the printer driver for LPR printing on Macintosh, check with your  
system administrator to make sure of the following:  
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.  
- The TCP/IP setting is correct.  
- LPD Printing Service is enabled on this equipment.  
170  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
   
1. Start the Desktop Printer Utility.  
•
•
The folder where contains the Desktop Printer Utility differs depend-  
ing on the Mac OS version. If you cannot locate the Desktop Printer  
Utility, search it in the book disk.  
The New Desktop Printer dialog box appears.  
2. Make sure “LaserWriter 8” is selected in the “With” drop  
down menu, select “Printer (LPR)” and click [OK].  
•
The Macintosh LPR Printer Selection dialog box opens.  
3. Click [Change...] in the PostScript Printer Description (PPD)  
File area.  
•
The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears.  
4. Select the PPD file for the equipment and click [Select].  
•
The PPD file varies depending on the equipment.  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO4511Series (for e-STUDIO4511 Series)  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
171  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO450Series (for e-STUDIO450 Series)  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO280Series (for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
5. Click [Change...] in the LPR Printer Selection area.  
•
The Internet Printer dialog box appears.  
6. Enter the IP Address of this equipment in the “Printer  
Address” field and “Print” in the “Queue” field. Then click  
[OK].  
7. Click [Create...].  
172  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
8. Enter the Desktop Printer name and click [Save].  
•
The printer is added to the desktop.  
9. Double-click the desktop printer icon that you created.  
•
The Desktop Printer utility window opens.  
10. Click the [Printing] menu and select [Change Setup...].  
•
The LaserWriter setup dialog box appears.  
11. Select each option item in the “Change” drop down menu  
and select installed option in the “To” drop down menu  
according to the configuration of this equipment.  
— FInisher  
Not Installed — Select this when no finisher is installed.  
Single Position Stapler — Select this when the Single-staple Finisher (only for  
e-STUDIO3511, e-STUDIO350, and e-STUDIO280 Series) is installed.  
Multi-Position Stapler — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher or Sad-  
dle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch — Select this when the Multi-staple  
Finisher or Saddle-stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed.  
Job Separator — Select this when the Job Separator is installed (only for  
e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series).  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
173  
Offset Tray — Select this when the Offset Tray is installed (only for  
e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series).  
NOTE:  
•
When you select “Multi-Position Stapler” or “Multi-Position Stapler and  
Hole Punch”, the saddle-stitching function will be selectable for print-  
ing. However, saddle-stitching is available only when the Sad-  
dle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
— Lower Drawer (only for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
Not Installed — Select this when the Lower Drawer is not installed.  
Installed — Select this when the Lower Drawer is installed.  
— Pedestal  
Not Installed — Select this when no pedestal is installed.  
Pedestal 1 — Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal is installed.  
Pedestal 2 — Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal and Drawer Module are  
installed.  
LCF — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.  
— ADU (only for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
Not Installed — Select this when the ADU is not installed.  
Installed — Select this when the ADU is installed.  
12. Click [OK].  
Configuring Macintosh AppleTalk printing  
PREPARATION:  
•
Before installing the printer driver for AppleTalk printing on Macintosh, check with  
your system administrator to make sure of the following:  
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.  
- The AppleTalk settings is correct.  
1. Click Apple menu and select [Chooser].  
•
The Chooser dialog box appears.  
174  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
 
2. Select the LaserWriter 8 icon (and select the AppleTalk zone if  
configured). Then select this equipment displayed in the list,  
and click [Create].  
•
The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears.  
3. Select the PPD file for the equipment and click [Select].  
•
The PPD file varies depending on the equipment.  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO4511Series (for e-STUDIO4511 Series)  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO450Series (for e-STUDIO450 Series)  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO280Series (for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
4. Select each option according to the configuration of this  
equipment and click [OK].  
— Finisher  
Not Installed — Select this if a finisher is not installed.  
Single Position Stapler — Select this when the Single-staple Finisher (only for  
e-STUDIO3511, e-STUDIO350, and e-STUDIO280 Series) is installed.  
Multi-Position Stapler — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher or Sad-  
dle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
175  
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch — Select this when the Multi-staple  
Finisher or Saddle-stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed.  
Job Separator — Select this when the Job Separator (only for e-STUDIO450  
Series and e-STUDIO280 Series) is installed.  
Offset Tray — Select this when the Offset Tray (only for e-STUDIO450 Series  
and e-STUDIO280 Series) is installed.  
NOTE:  
•
When you select “Multi-Position Stapler” or “Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch”,  
the saddle-stitching function will be selectable for printing. However, saddle-stitch-  
ing is available only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
— Lower Drawer (only for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
Not Installed — Select this when the Lower Drawer is not installed.  
Installed — Select this when the Lower Drawer is installed.  
— Pedestal  
Not Installed — Select this when no pedestal is installed.  
Pedestal 1 — Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal is installed.  
Pedestal 2 — Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal and Drawer Module are  
installed.  
LCF — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.  
— ADU (only for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
Not Installed — Select this when the ADU is not installed.  
Installed — Select this when the ADU is installed.  
5. Close the Chooser Dialog box.  
•
The Printer icon is created on the desktop.  
Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later  
Install and configure the printer by the following steps:  
P.176 "Installing the Macintosh PPD File"  
P.177 "Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X"  
P.182 "Configuring the Installable Options"  
Installing the Macintosh PPD File  
This equipment supports printing from Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later.  
Copying the PPD file to Mac OS X  
1. Insert the Client1 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and open  
your language folder in the “MacPPD” folder.  
2. Copy the GZ file (.gz) to the desktop, and extract the Macin-  
tosh PPD file.  
•
The GZ file varies depending on the equipment.  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO4511Series.gz (for e-STUDIO4511 Series)  
176  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
       
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO450Series.gz (for e-STUDIO450 Series)  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO280Series.gz (for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
3. Double-click the boot drive icon and open the “Library:Print-  
ers:PPDS:Contents:Resources:en.lproj” folder.  
4. Copy the PPD file for Mac OS X to the “en.lproj” folder.  
5. Continue the procedure for configuring the printer.  
P.177 "Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X"  
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X  
After you copy the PPD file to the library folder in the System Folder, you can configure the  
printer.  
This equipment supports two types of Macintosh Printing Service: IP Printing and AppleTalk  
Printing.  
•
IP Printing  
When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP/IP network, you can  
enable IP printing from Macintosh computer.  
•
AppleTalk Printing  
When this equipment and your computer are connected over AppleTalk network, you can  
enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computer.  
Configuring Macintosh IP printing  
1. Start the Print Center (for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8) or Printer  
Setup Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3 or later), located in the  
“Applications:Utility” folder in the Boot Disk.  
•
The Printer List dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Add].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
177  
   
3. Select “IP Printing” in the drop down box.  
4. Enter the IP address or DNS name of this equipment in the  
“Printer’s Address” field.  
5. Uncheck the “Use default queue on server” box and enter  
“Print” in the “Queue Name” field.  
178  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
6. Select “Other...” at the “Printer Model” drop down box.  
•
The Choose a File dialog box appears.  
7. Locate the folder into which the PPD file was copied, select  
the PPD file, and click [Choose].  
8. Click [Add].  
•
The printer is added to the Printer List.  
9. Continue the procedure to configure the installable options.  
P.182 "Configuring the Installable Options"  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
179  
Configuring Macintosh AppleTalk printing  
1. Start the Print Center (for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8) or Printer  
Setup Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3 or later), located “Applica-  
tions:Utility” folder in the Boot Disk.  
•
The Printer List dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Add].  
3. Select “AppleTalk” in the drop down box and select the zone  
name that this equipment is located.  
•
If the AppleTalk network is not configured with a zone, select “Local  
AppleTalk zone”.  
180  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
 
4. Select this equipment displayed in the list.  
5. Select “Other...” at the “Printer Model” drop down box.  
•
The Choose a File dialog box appears.  
6. Locate the folder that the PPD file is copied, select the PPD  
file, and click [Choose].  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
181  
7. Click [Add].  
•
The printer is added to the Printer List.  
8. Continue the procedure to configure the installable options.  
P.182 "Configuring the Installable Options"  
Configuring the Installable Options  
Users must configure the installable options before printing.  
Configuring the installable options  
1. In the Printer List dialog box, select the printer and, then,  
select [Show Info] in the [Printers] menu.  
•
The Printer Info dialog box appears.  
2. Select “Installable Options” in the drop down menu.  
182  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
 
•
The Installable Options window is displayed.  
3. Set the following options.  
— Finisher  
Not Installed — Select this if a finisher is not installed.  
Single Position Stapler — Select this when the Single-staple Finisher (only for  
e-STUDIO3511, e-STUDIO350, and e-STUDIO280 Series) is installed.  
Multi-Position Stapler — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher or Sad-  
dle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch — Select this when the Multi-staple  
Finisher or Saddle-stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed.  
Job Separator — Select this when the Job Separator (only for e-STUDIO450  
Series and e-STUDIO280 Series) is installed.  
Offset Tray — Select this when the Offset Tray (only for e-STUDIO450 Series  
and e-STUDIO280 Series) is installed.  
— Lower Drawer (only for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
Not Installed — Select this when the Lower Drawer is not installed.  
Installed — Select this when the Lower Drawer is installed.  
— Pedestal  
Not Installed — Select this when no pedestal is installed.  
Pedestal 1 — Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal is installed.  
Pedestal 2 — Select this when the Paper Feed Pedestal and Drawer Module are  
installed.  
LCF — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.  
— ADU (only for e-STUDIO280 Series)  
Not Installed — Select this when the ADU is not installed.  
Installed — Select this when the ADU is installed.  
NOTE:  
•
If you are using the Mac OS X 10.3.0 or earlier, finisher options such as stapling and  
hole punching can be selected even if you select “Not Installed” for the Finisher  
option. If you select the finisher options for printing but the finisher is not installed,  
finisher settings will be ignored and perform printing correctly.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
183  
4. Click [Apply Changes] and close the window.  
184  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh  
Installing Client Software for UNIX  
NOTE:  
•
Printing from UNIX is available only when the Network Interface Card is installed.  
Please refer to following instructions for configuring printing systems on UNIX workstations.  
About Client Software for UNIX  
In the Admin’s Client CD-ROM, the following filters for UNIX workstations are included:  
„
net_est4511 (for e-STUDIO4511 Series) /  
net_estbw (for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series)  
This file is a shell script that will be installed in “/usr/lib/lp/model”. It contains all the pars-  
ing for the printer specific commands and it generates all the output code. Being a shell  
script, a system administrator can modify it if a site requires any custom options or if other  
components are installed in non-standard locations.  
„
„
lpdsend  
This is an executable program that is called by net_est4511, or net_estbw to send the print  
file to the system using the LPD protocol. This program will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/  
tap/bin”.  
lpLinux.sh  
(Linux filter only)  
This file is a shell script that simulates the command line functions of lp. After processing  
the command line options, the e-STUDIO filter is invoked in the same way as a System V  
print filter. This file is installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link to this file will be  
installed in the “/usr/local/bin” directory as lptap.  
„
est4511Backend (for e-STUDIO4511 Series) /  
estbwBackend (for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series)  
(AIX filter only)  
This is an executable program that is called by the AIX qdaemon. It receives the arguments  
from the qdaemon, interrogates it for copy information etc. then calls the queues' copy of  
net_est4511, or net_estbw to run the print. This program will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/  
tap/bin”.  
„
„
„
est4511add (for e-STUDIO4511 Series) /  
estbwadd (for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series)  
This file is a shell script that is used to create a printer description. This file will be installed  
in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link will be installed in the “/bin” directory that will  
point to the actual location of this file.  
est4511rm (for e-STUDIO4511 Series) /  
estbwrm (for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series)  
This file is a shell script that is used to remove a printer description. This file will be  
installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link will be installed in the “/bin” directory  
that will point to the actual location of this file.  
net_est4511.1 (for e-STUDIO4511 Series) /  
estbw.1 (for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series)  
This is an input file for the man command that supplies online documentation for the printer  
specific options. This file will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/man/man1”. A symbolic link  
will be installed in the /usr/man/man1 directory that will point to the actual location of this  
file.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
185  
       
Planning for Installation  
System Requirements  
For UNIX workstation, the following environment is required.  
OS:  
Sun Solaris v2.5.1/2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9  
HP-UX Version 10.20/11.x  
IBM AIX 4.1.5/4.3.3/5L  
SCO UnixWare 7  
SCO OpenUnix 8  
Red Hat Linux 6.2/7.1/7.2/7.3/8.0  
SuSE Linux ver 7.0/8.1  
Mandrake Linux ver 7.1/9  
Turbo Linux 8  
Protocol:  
Module:  
TCP/IP  
Python must be installed.  
NOTE:  
•
The “Python” module must be installed on your Unix workstation to enable printing.  
The “Python” module is usually installed in the “/usr/bin/” directory. Check this direc-  
tory whether the “Python” module is installed.  
Installing the Printer on UNIX  
Installing the UNIX Filters  
UNIX Filters are provided as TAR files for each Operating System. You can install them by  
copying the TAR file into the root directory and extract the file.  
Copying the UNIX filters  
1. Insert the Admin’s Client CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Log on to the root account and copy the TAR file into the root  
folder.  
•
A TAR file for each operating system is included in following folders:  
For Solaris: [CD-ROM]/solarisfilter/usa/  
For HP-UX:[CD-ROM]/hp-uxfilter/usa/  
For AIX:[CD-ROM]/aixfilter/usa/  
For Linux: [CD-ROM]/linuxfilter/usa/  
For OpenUnix: [CD-ROM]/openunixfilter/usa/  
3. Enter the following command and check the output:  
•
For Solaris:  
uname -a  
Output on screen should be:  
SunOS  
186  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
           
•
•
•
•
For HP-UX:  
uname -a  
Output on screen should be:  
HP-UX  
For IBM AIX:  
uname -a  
Output on screen should be:  
AIX  
For Linux:  
uname -a  
Output on screen should be:  
Linux  
For OpenUnix:  
uname -a  
Output on screen should be:  
OpenUNIX  
NOTE:  
•
If the output is not as above, ask your administrator.  
4. Change to the root directory.  
5. Enter the following command:  
•
•
•
•
•
For Solaris:  
tar xvf solaris.tar  
For HP-UX:  
tar xvf hpux.tar  
For IBM AIX:  
tar xvf aix.tar  
For Linux:  
tar xvf linux.tar  
For OpenUnix:  
tar xvf openunix.tar  
6. The command extracts all the required files and installs them  
in the correct locations. Continue the procedure for configur-  
ing the print queue.  
P.187 "Configuring the Print Queue"  
Configuring the Print Queue  
After you copy UNIX Filters, you can configure the print queue.  
There are two ways to configure the print queue: one is creating a print queue using est4511add/  
estbwadd, and the other is creating a print queue manually without using est4511add/estbwadd.  
P.188 "Creating a Print Queue Using est4511add/estbwadd"  
P.188 "Creating a Print Queue Manually"  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
187  
 
— Creating a Print Queue Using est4511add/estbwadd  
You can create a print queue using est4511add/estbwadd.  
Creating a print queue  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Enter the following command:  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
est4511add <queue name> <host name or IP address>  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
estbwadd <queue name> <host name or IP address>  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
•
This command creates a print queue using the system’s lpadmin command. It also  
creates a configuration file that has the destination IP address or host name. Use  
the configuration file to change print queue parameters.  
The lpadmin command stores the printer interface file in the /etc/lp/interfaces direc-  
tory in a file with the same name as the print queue. The configuration file is stored  
in the /etc/lp/interfaces directory in a file named <queue name>.conf.  
Under Linux, the printtool (or equivalent) utility must be used to add the printer into  
the lp printing system after executing the est4511add or est 450add command.  
— Creating a Print Queue Manually  
You can also configure the print queue by adding a remote printer manually.  
The procedure varies depending on the operating systems.  
P.188 "Creating a print queue manually on Solaris"  
P.189 "Creating a print queue manually on HP-UX"  
P.190 "Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX"  
P.191 "Creating a print queue manually on Linux"  
P.192 "Creating a print queue manually on OpenUnix"  
Creating a print queue manually on Solaris  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Open your Linux/Unix editor.  
3. Create the following file.  
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf  
4. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.  
dest=<IP address>  
5. Save the file.  
6. Enter the following command:  
chmod +x <queue name>.conf  
188  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
       
7. Enter the following command:  
chown lp:lp <queue name>.conf  
8. Enter the following command:  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \  
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_est4511  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \  
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_estbw  
9. Enter the following command:  
accept <queue name>  
10. Enter the following command:  
enable <queue name>  
Creating a print queue manually on HP-UX  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Open your Linux/Unix editor.  
3. Create the following file.  
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf  
4. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.  
dest=<IP address>  
5. Save the file.  
6. Enter the following command:  
chmod +x <queue name>.conf  
7. Enter the following command:  
chown lp:lp <queue name>.conf  
8. Enter the following command:  
ps -ef | grep lpsched | grep -iv grep > /dev/null 2>&1  
9. Enter the following command:  
Echo $?  
10. If “0” is outputted on the screen, turn the scheduler OFF.  
Enter the following command:  
/usr/sbin/lpshut > /dev/null 2>&1  
11. Enter the following command:  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
189  
 
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null \  
-m net_est4511 -o rm <queue name> -orpdssc -ob3  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null \  
-m net_estbw -o rm <queue name> -orpdssc -ob3  
12. Enter the following command:  
accept <queue name>  
13. Enter the following command:  
enable <queue name>  
14. If you turn OFF the scheduler in step 10, turn the scheduler  
ON. Enter the following command:  
/usr/lpsched > /dev/null 2>&1  
Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX  
1. Enter the following command:  
ls /opt/toshiba/tap/filter  
2. If the above directory does not exist, enter the following com-  
mand:  
mkdir /opt/toshiba/tap/filter  
3. Log on to the root account.  
4. Open your Linux/Unix editor.  
5. Create the following file.  
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf  
6. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.  
dest=<IP address>  
7. Save the file.  
8. Enter the following command:  
mkque -q <queue name> \  
-a s_statfilter = /usr/lib/lpd/bsdshort \  
-a up = TRUE -a host = <IP address> -a rq = dssc  
9. Enter the following command:  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
mkquedev -q <queue name> -d dev_<queue name> \  
-a backend = /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/est4511Backend  
190  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
 
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
mkquedev -q <queue name> -d dev_<queue name> \  
-a backend = /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/estbwBackend  
10. Enter the following command:  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
cp /usr/lib/lpd/pio/predef/net_est4511 \  
/opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
cp /usr/lib/lpd/pio/predef/net_estbw \  
/opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>  
Creating a print queue manually on Linux  
1. Enter the following command:  
ls /opt/toshiba/tap/interface  
2. If the above directory does not exist, enter the following com-  
mand:  
mkdir /opt/toshiba/tap/interface  
3. As root open your Linux/Unix editor.  
4. Open your Linux/Unix editor.  
5. Create the following file.  
/opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>.conf  
6. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.  
dest=<IP address>  
7. Save the file.  
8. Enter the following command:  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
cp /opt/toshiba/tap/model/net_est4511 \  
/opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
cp /opt/toshiba/tap/model/net_estbw \  
/opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>  
9. Enter the following command:  
/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/modPrintcap \  
-a <queue name> <IP address>  
10. Enter the following command:  
ls /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
191  
 
11. If the above file exists, enter the following command.  
/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/printconf_import \  
–a <queue name> IP_ADDRESS \  
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>  
12. Restart your lpd.  
Creating a print queue manually on OpenUnix  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Open your Linux/Unix editor.  
3. Create the following file.  
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf  
4. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.  
dest=<IP address>  
5. Save the file.  
6. Enter the following command:  
chmod +x <queue name>.conf  
7. Enter the following command:  
chown lp:lp <queue name>.conf  
8. Enter the following command:  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \  
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_est4511  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \  
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_estbw  
9. Enter the following command:  
accept <queue name>  
10. Enter the following command:  
enable <queue name>  
Changing the Default Values  
You can change the default values of a print queue by the following procedure.  
192  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
   
Changing the default values of a print queue  
1. Study the interface file, named <queue name>, stored in the /  
etc/lp/interfaces directory.  
•
This file contains all of the default settings and values that can be set.  
These values are case sensitive and must conform to the /bin/sh vari-  
able format.  
2. To manually edit the configuration file (/etc/lp/interfaces/  
<queue name>.conf), add a line that consists of the parameter  
and value.  
•
For example, to change the default orientation to Landscape, add the  
following line:  
orient= “LANDSCAPE”  
Deleting the Print Queue  
There are two ways to delete the print queue: one is deleting a print queue using est4511rm/estb-  
wrm, and the other is deleting a print queue manually without using est4511rm/estbwrm.  
P.193 "Deleting a Print Queue Using est4511rm/estbwrm"  
P.193 "Deleting a Print Queue Manually"  
— Deleting a Print Queue Using est4511rm/estbwrm  
When you want to delete the queue using est4511rm/estbwrm, perform the following procedure.  
Deleting a print queue  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Enter the following command:  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
est4511rm <queue name>  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
estbwrm <queue name>  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
•
This command uses the system’s lpadmin command to delete the print queue and  
configuration file.  
Please restart the lpd under Linux.  
— Deleting a Print Queue Manually  
You can also configure the print queue by adding a print queue manually.  
The procedure varies depending on the operating systems.  
P.194 "Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris"  
P.194 "Deleting a print queue manually on HP-UX"  
P.194 "Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX"  
P.195 "Deleting a print queue manually on Linux"  
P.195 "Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUnix"  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
193  
         
Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Enter the following command:  
lpadmin -x <queue name>  
3. Enter the following command:  
rm /etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf  
Deleting a print queue manually on HP-UX  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Enter the following command:  
ps –ef | grep lpsched | grep –iv grep > /dev/null 2>&1  
3. Enter the following command:  
Echo $?  
4. If “0” outputted on the screen, turn the scheduler OFF. Enter  
the following command:  
/usr/sbin/lpshut > /dev/null 2>&1  
5. Enter the following command:  
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x <queue name>  
6. Enter the following command:  
rm /etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf  
7. If “0” was outputted on the screen in step 3, turn the sched-  
uler ON. Enter the following command:  
/usr/sbin/lpsched > /dev/null 2>&1  
Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Enter the following command:  
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>  
3. Enter the following command:  
rm /opt/oshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>.conf  
4. Enter the following command:  
rmquedev -q <queue name> -d dev_<queue name>  
194  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
     
5. Enter the following command:  
rmque -q <queue name>  
Deleting a print queue manually on Linux  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Enter the following command:  
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>  
3. Enter the following command:  
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>.conf  
4. Enter the following command:  
/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/modPrintcap -d <queue name>  
5. Enter the following command:  
ls /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>  
6. If the above file exists, enter the following command:  
/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/printconf_import \  
–d <queue name> \  
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>  
7. Restart your lpd.  
Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUnix  
1. Log on to the root account.  
2. Enter the following command:  
lpadmin -x <queue name>  
3. Enter the following command:  
rm /etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf  
Installing the CUPS  
The Admin’s Client CD-ROM also includes the CUPS files that enable the CUPS print system.  
Installing the CUPS  
1. Insert the Admin’s Client CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Log on to the root account and copy the GZIP file into the  
“usr/share/cups/model/” directory.  
•
A GZIP file is included in the “CUPS/USA” folder in the CD-ROM.  
3. Enter the following command:  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
195  
     
For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
cp TOSHIBA_EST4511_CUPS.gz /usr/share/cups/model/  
For e-STUDIO450 Series:  
cp TOSHIBA_EST450_CUPS.gz /usr/share/cups/model/  
For e-STUDIO280 Series:  
cp TOSHIBA_EST280_CUPS.gz /usr/share/cups/model/  
4. Enter the following command:  
service lpd stop  
•
•
When using the Red Hat Linux, continue to the next step.  
When using other than the Red Hat Linux, skip to step 8.  
5. When using the Red Hat Linux, enter the following command:  
/usr/bin/redhat-switch-printer  
•
The redhat-switch-printer dialog box appears.  
6. Select “CUPS” and click [OK].  
•
The information dialog box appears.  
7. Click [OK].  
8. Enter the following command:  
service cups start  
9. Enter the following command:  
/usr/bin/cupsconfig  
•
The Common UNIX Printing System page appears.  
10. Click the “Manage Printers” link.  
•
The Printer page is displayed.  
11. Click [Add Printer].  
•
The Prompt dialog box appers.  
12. Enter the user name and password that has the Super User  
privilege, and click [OK].  
•
The Admin page is displayed.  
13. Enter the printer name in the “Name” field and click [Con-  
tinue].  
14. Select “Internet Printing Protocol (http)” at the “Device” drop  
down box and click [Continue].  
15. Enter the IPP URL address (http://<IP address>:631/Print) for  
the equipment in the “Device URL” field and click [Continue].  
16. Select “TOSHIBA” at the “Make” drop down box and click  
[Continue].  
196  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
17. Select the model name for this equipment in the “Model” list  
and click [Continue].  
18. Click the printer name link.  
19. When you want to configure the print options, click [Config-  
ure Printer].  
20. Change the settings as you require, and click [Continue] in  
each area to save settings.  
Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX  
197  
Other Installation Procedures  
Installing the Client Software from TopAccess  
If the system administrator has uploaded the driver software to this equipment, you can use  
TopAccess to install the software on your workstation.  
Installing client software from TopAccess for Windows  
1. In TopAccess, click the Install Software link at the bottom of  
the screen.  
•
The Install Client Software page opens.  
2. Click the “Install Client1” link to download the installer file.  
3. Download the installer file on your desktop by following the  
prompts.  
4. Double-click the “InstallClient1.exe” file that you down-  
loaded.  
•
The installer starts and the InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.  
5. Follow the installation procedure using the Client1 CD-ROM  
described in following section.  
P.18 "Installing Client Software for Windows"  
198  
Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures  
     
Installing client software from TopAccess for Macintosh  
1. In TopAccess, click the Install Software link at the bottom of  
the screen.  
•
The Install Client Software page opens.  
2. Click the “Macintosh PPD Files” link.  
•
The software components list is displayed.  
3. Click the File Name link that you want to download.  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO4511Series.sit — Click this link to download the PPD file  
for Mac OS 8.6/9.x and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.  
Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures  
199  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO4511Series.gz — Click this link to download the PPD file  
for Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series:  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO450Series.sit — Click this link to download the PPD file for  
Mac OS 8.6/9.x and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO450Series.gz — Click this link to download the PPD file for  
Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later.  
For e-STUDIO280 Series:  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO280Series.sit — Click this link to download the PPD file for  
Mac OS 8.6/9.x and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.  
TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO280Series.gz — Click this link to download the PPD file for  
Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later.  
4. Download the PPD file of your Mac OS version on your desk-  
top by following the prompts.  
5. After you download the PPD file, refer to the installation pro-  
cedure for Macintosh to set up the printer.  
P.169 "Installing Client Software for Macintosh"  
Installing client software from TopAccess for Unix  
1. In TopAccess, click the Install Software link at the bottom of  
the screen.  
•
The Install Client Software page opens.  
200  
Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures  
2. Click the “Unix Filters” link.  
•
The software components list is displayed.  
3. Click the Unix filter link that you want to install.  
4. Download the Unix tar file containing the Unix filters on your  
desktop by following the prompts.  
5. After you download the Unix tar file, refer to the installation  
procedure for Unix to set up the printer.  
P.185 "Installing Client Software for UNIX"  
Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures  
201  
202  
Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures  
3. PRINTING  
Printing Guide — 3. Printing  
203  
 
Printing from Windows  
This equipment supports printing from Windows applications using the PCL5c, PCL6 and PS3  
printer drivers.  
These printer drivers allow you to define such document properties as the orientation and print  
quality of your pages, and such complex finishing options as booklet layout and multi-position  
stapling.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The PCL5c Printer Driver is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
Before Using the Printer Driver  
Before printing, you have to configure the following options:  
•
Configuration Settings  
You have to configure such options as optional drawers, finisher, and hole punch unit. The  
features of these optional devices are not available unless you tell the system that the  
optional devices are installed.  
•
Department Code  
This system can manage jobs by department code. This feature lets you manage job  
counters for every department code. For example, a network administrator can check the  
number of copies printed from specific department member.  
If the Department Code is enabled, enter your Department Code provided by your adminis-  
trator.  
Configuring the Options  
After you complete the installation of the printer drivers, you should configure the option set-  
tings on the printer drivers.  
There are two methods to configure the options;  
•
If this equipment and your computer are not connected in the TCP/IP network, you can con-  
figure the options manually.  
P.205 "Configuring the Options Manually"  
•
If this equipment and your computer are connected in the TCP/IP network, you can config-  
ure the options automatically obtaining the settings using the SNMP Communication.  
P.206 "Configuring the Options Automatically"  
NOTES:  
•
•
When the printer drivers are installed using Point and Print on Windows 98/Me, you  
must click [Update Now] in the [Configuration] tab before starting to use for printing.  
When the printer drivers are installed using Point and Print on Windows NT 4.0/  
2000/XP/Server 2003 and the option settings are changed in the [Configuration] tab,  
the changes that are made in the [Configuration] tab will not be made available  
when printing from the application unless you change and apply one of the settings  
in the print options that are shown in the [Printing Default] button in the [Advanced]  
tab (for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003) or the [Document Default] command in the  
[File] menu (for Windows NT 4.0). After you change one of the settings, the  
changes that you made in the [Configuration] tab will be correctly applied.  
The following procedure describes how to make the changes that you made in the  
[Configuration] tab available from the application. The operation varies depending  
on the operating system.  
For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003  
204  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
         
1. After you change the option settings in the [Configuration] tab, display the  
[Advanced] tab and click [Printing Default].  
2. Change one of the settings. (For example, change “Number of Copies”.)  
3. Click [OK] to save changes. Now, the changes that you made in the [Configura-  
tion] tab apply correctly in the printer driver.  
4. If required, click [Printing Default] in the [Advanced] tab and restore the setting  
that you changed in Step 2 to the original value and click [OK].  
For Windows NT 4.0  
1. After you change the option settings in the [Configuration] tab, click [OK] to close  
the Properties dialog box.  
2. Select the printer driver and select [Document Defaults] in the [File] menu.  
3. Change one of the settings. (For example, change “Number of Copies”.)  
4. Click [OK] to save changes. Now, the changes that you made in the [Configura-  
tion] tab apply correctly in the printer driver.  
5. If required, select [Document Defaults] in the [File] menu and restore the setting  
that you changed in Step 3 to the original value and click [OK].  
— Configuring the Options Manually  
The following describes an instruction on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
other versions of Windows are used.  
Setting the configuration tab manually  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
1. Select the printer driver in the Printers folder. Then click [File]  
and select [Properties].  
•
•
When you are operating under Windows XP/Server 2003, open the  
Printers and Faxes folder to access the printer driver.  
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
205  
 
2. Display the [Configuration] tab and set the following options.  
Pedestal — This sets whether or not optional drawers or large capacity feeder is  
installed.  
Finisher — This sets whether or not optional finisher is installed.  
Hole Punch — This sets whether or not optional hole punch unit is installed.  
Automatic Duplexer — This sets whether or not optional automatic duplexer is  
installed. (e-STUDIO280 Series Only)  
Upper Drawer/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that  
is loaded in the Upper Drawer.  
Lower Drawer/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that  
is loaded in the Lower Drawer.  
Pedestal Upper/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper  
that is loaded in the Pedestal 1 when it is installed.  
Pedestal Lower/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper  
that is loaded in the Pedestal 2 when it is installed.  
Large Capacity/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper  
that is loaded in the Large Capacity Feeder when it is installed.  
Bypass Feeder — Select the paper type of paper that is loaded in the Stack  
Feed Bypass.  
Memory — Select the size of memory.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
For more information about each item, see descriptions about the Configuration  
Tab.  
P.246 "Configuration Tab"  
3. Click [Apply] and [OK] to save settings.  
— Configuring the Options Automatically  
The following describes an instruction on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same when  
other versions of Windows are used.  
206  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
   
Setting the configuration tab using SNMP communication  
REQUIREMENT:  
•
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”  
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
1. Select the printer driver in the Printers folder. Then click [File]  
and select [Properties].  
•
•
When you are operating under Windows XP/Server 2003, open the  
Printers and Faxes folder to access the printer driver.  
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
2. Display the [Configuration] tab, check on “Enable SNMP  
Communication”, and click [Update Now].  
•
The printer driver starts communicating with system and obtains  
option settings automatically.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
207  
 
NOTE:  
•
If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly, the message  
“The address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be  
displayed. If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for the equipment using the  
TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box. After searching the equipment, the  
SNMP communication will be enabled. For the instructions on how to search the  
equipment, refer to the instructions of TopAccessDocMon.  
P.335 "Searching for a Printer"  
3. If you want to update option settings automatically when the  
[Configuration] tab is opened, check on “Update Automati-  
cally”.  
4. Click [Apply] and [OK] to save settings.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
For more information about each item, see descriptions about the Configuration  
Tab.  
P.246 "Configuration Tab"  
Setting the Department Code  
When this equipment is managed by department codes, you have to enter your department code  
on the printer driver.  
This allows a network administrator to check the number of copies printed from specific depart-  
ment members. Also users can check to see who submitted the print jobs, by using the Touch  
Panel Display and monitoring tools.  
Please ask your administrator whether or not you should enter the Department Code.  
208  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
   
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which  
no department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on  
the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis-  
trator mode and whether the SNMP Communication is enabled or not. When the  
SNMP Communication and Department Code Enforcement are enabled, an error  
message will be displayed when entering the invalid department code. When the  
SNMP Communication is disabled and Department Code Enforcement is enabled,  
the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code  
print job list without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled,  
the invalid department code print job will be printed.  
However, when using Windows NT 4.0 and configure the connection through a Net-  
Ware print server, an error message for entering the invalid department code will not  
be displayed even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Commu-  
nication is enabled.  
•
A department code can be entered every time you begin printing. If you have to use  
a different department code for each print job, enter it when you begin printing.  
Entering department code  
1. Select the printer driver in the Printers folder. Then click  
[File] and select [Properties] (for Windows 98/Me), select  
[Document Defaults...] (for Windows NT 4.0), or [Printing Pref-  
erences...] (for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).  
•
The printer driver properties dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
209  
2. Display the [Print Job] tab and enter your department code in  
the “Department” field.  
•
In the Department field, only numeric characters can be entered. The  
Department Code must be 5-digit number.  
3. Click [Apply] and [OK] to save settings.  
Copying the PPD File for Windows  
The Client1 CD-ROM contains a printer description file for popular Windows applications.  
PageMaker 6.0, 6.5, and 7.0 do not support automatic installation of printer description files. To  
make printing available in the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes of this application, copy the  
printer description file to the appropriate location.  
Copying the printer description file  
1. On the Client1 CD-ROM, open the folder that contains the PS3  
printer driver.  
•
•
•
For Windows 98/Me:  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\9X_ME\PS\<language>\  
For Windows NT 4.0:  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\NT\PS\<language>\  
For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003:  
[Client1 CD-ROM]:\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>\  
2. Copy the printer description file (*.ppd) to the appropriate  
location.  
•
•
•
For PageMaker 6.0:  
\PM6\RSRC\USENGLSH\PPD4  
For PageMaker 6.5:  
\PM65\RSRC\USENGLSH\PPD4  
For PageMaker 7.0:  
\Program Files\Adobe\PageMaker 7.0\Rsrc\Usenglish\PPD4  
210  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
NOTE:  
•
When you print a document using the PPD file for e-STUDIO4511 Series, you can  
select the high resolution setting (such as “Color High-res General”) for the Color  
Resolution Type in the Print dialog box even if the optional expansion memory is not  
installed. In that case, the print job will not be printed.  
Printing from Application  
Considerations and Limitations  
•
Some options listed in the printer driver can also be set from an application (for example,  
collation). However, using collation in the application may cause problems. In that case, use  
the driver option to perform the function, rather than setting it from the application. But  
depending on the application, settings such as the orientation may need to be set in the appli-  
cation, or the printer driver, or both. The application may not set up the file properly for  
printing on this equipment and may also take longer to process. In order to print properly  
from the application that you are using, please see the section about printing in the applica-  
tion’s manual.  
How to Print  
Once you have installed the printer driver and configured it properly, you can print directly from  
most Windows applications. Simply choose the Print command from within your application.  
You can print using the various functions by setting print options on the printer driver.  
Printing from Windows applications  
1. Open a file and select [Print] from the [File] menu of the appli-  
cation.  
•
The Print dialog box appears.  
2. Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and  
Click [Properties].  
•
The printer properties dialog box appears.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
The procedures for displaying the properties dialog for the printer driver may be dif-  
ferent depending on an application that you are using. See your application’s man-  
ual about displaying the printer properties dialog box.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
211  
     
3. Setting the Print Options for each tab according to how you  
want to print.  
•
•
Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a  
document.  
P.216 "Print Options"  
You can also set the print options using setting profiles.  
P.213 "Setting Print Options Using Profiles"  
4. Click [OK] to save the settings.  
5. Click [OK] or [Print] to print a document.  
Setting Up Print Options  
Print Options are the attributes you set to define the way a print job is processed. For example,  
the private print and proof print options determine how the copier manages your print job.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
To find the printing instructions for your specific needs, refer to the procedures in the  
following section.  
P.249 "Printing with Extended Print Functionality"  
212  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
How to Setup  
There are several ways to set print options. Also, how the settings effect printing varies depend-  
ing on the way you set the options. Also the tabs displayed vary depending on how you display  
the printer properties.  
— Setting Initial Values of Print Options  
Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Printers folder within the  
Windows Start menu will establish the initial values of the options. For example, the paper size  
setting you most commonly use, optional device settings, user information settings, etc., are set-  
tings you will not want to change every time you print. It is convenient to set these options as  
initial values.  
NOTE:  
•
If you have install the printer driver by Point-and-Print on Windows 2000, Windows  
XP, or Windows Server 2003, please set the initial values of print options from the  
[Printing Default] button in the [Advanced] tab on the properties dialog box that can  
be displayed by selecting [Properties] in the [File] menu. The initial values cannot  
be set by the following method.  
How to display:  
1. Click [Start], [Settings], and select [Printers] (for Windows 98/  
Me/NT 4.0/2000) or [Printers and Faxes] (for Windows XP/  
Server 2003).  
2. Select the printer driver for the equipment, click the [File]  
menu and select [Properties] (for Windows 98/Me), [Docu-  
ment Defaults] (for Windows NT 4.0), or [Printing Prefer-  
ences] (for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).  
— Setting Print Options for Each Print Job  
Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Print dialog box within an  
application will establish the values for the current print job. The print option settings specific to  
each print job are set using this method.  
How to display:  
1. Click the [File] menu and select [Print] on an application.  
2. Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and  
Click [Properties].  
— Setting Print Options Using Profiles  
Print option settings can be saved so you can easily load specifically configured settings for a  
particular job.  
In order to print a document using profiles, you should create the saved profile first.  
P.214 "Saving profile"  
Once you save profile, you can load the settings for a particular job to print a document.  
P.215 "Loading profile"  
You can also delete the profile that you no longer require.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
213  
         
P.215 "Deleting profile"  
Saving profile  
You can create up to 20 profiles for a printer driver.  
1. Configure the print options on each tab.  
•
Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a  
document.  
P.216 "Print Options"  
2. Click [Save As...] at the Profile group.  
•
The Profile Name dialog box appears.  
3. Enter the profile name and click [OK].  
•
The file name can be up to 32 characters long.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If you enter the existing profile name, it prompts whether overwrite the existing pro-  
file or not. If you want to overwrite the existing profile, click [OK].  
4. The setting profile is saved.  
214  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
Loading profile  
1. Select a profile in the “Profile” drop down box.  
•
The settings profile is loaded from the file and apply to the printer  
options.  
Deleting profile  
1. Select a profile that you want to delete in the “Profile” drop  
down box, and click [Delete].  
•
The Confirm Profile Delete dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Yes] to delete the selected profile.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
215  
   
Print Options  
This section describes print options in each tab of the printer driver. This section will help you  
to find the description of specific print options, or understand the functions for each print option.  
1
2
3
4
5
9
6
7
8
1) Printer Name  
Displays the name given to the printer driver when it was installed, or the name it displays  
on the icon in the Printer folder.  
2) Menu Tabs  
The menu items of the printer driver are displayed as tabs. Clicking on a tab will display the  
contents of the selected tab. The tabs displayed vary depending on the way the print proper-  
ties are displayed.  
•
•
•
Setup Tab  
The Setup tab contains basic print operation settings, such as original paper size, print  
paper size, paper source, paper type, orientation, number of copies, and so on. Also this  
tab allows you to enable enlarge/reduce printing, sort printing, stapling and punching,  
and 2-sided printing.  
P.218 "Setup Tab"  
Print Job Tab  
The Print Job tab contains job type settings that select the way this equipment handles  
the print job. This tab also allows you to enable various job types such as Scheduled  
Print, Private Print, and Proof Print. And you can print a document as an overlay file, or  
store to e-Filing.  
P.224 "Print Job Tab"  
Layout Tab  
The Layout Tab contains finishing options such as Cover page printing, Booklet print-  
ing, and N-up printing.  
P.226 "Layout Tab - Standard Window"  
P.230 "Layout Tab - Booklet Window"  
P.233 "Layout Tab - Multiple Pages per Sheet Window"  
216  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
•
Effect Tab  
The Effect Tab contains print options that add the effects to your print jobs such as  
Watermarks, Overlay Image printing, Rotate printing, Mirror printing, and Negative  
printing. Also it allows to enable Toner Save and Smoothing functions.  
P.235 "Effect Tab"  
•
•
•
Image Quality Tab  
The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed. You can easily  
select appropriate image quality depending on the type of job being printed.  
P.239 "Image Quality Tab"  
Fonts Tab  
The Fonts Tab allows you to select how the TrueType fonts are printed. This tab is only  
displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder.  
P.244 "Font Tab"  
Configuration Tab  
The Configuration Tab allows you to configure the options. When any optional unit is  
installed in this equipment, set the configuration of the machine on this tab. This tab is  
only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder.  
P.246 "Configuration Tab"  
•
About Tab  
The About Tab contains the version information of the printer driver.  
P.249 "About Tab"  
3) Preview window  
In the Preview windows, you can check the current settings in the printer driver. You can  
change view type by clicking [Graphic] to display the print options settings graphically or  
[Text] to display the print options settings as a texts.  
4) Profile  
Print option settings can be saved on your hard disk. You can save print option settings by  
clicking [Save As...] and easily load a setting file by selecting a profile name in the drop  
down box.  
P.213 "Setting Print Options Using Profiles"  
5) [Restore Defaults]  
Click this to restore the settings to the original factory defaults.  
6) [OK]  
Click this to enter the input settings and complete the print options settings.  
7) [Cancel]  
Click this to cancel the input settings and exit the print options settings.  
8) [Apply]  
Click this to enter the input settings without closing the print options settings. This button is  
only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder for Win-  
dows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. This button  
remains grayed out until a setting is changed.  
9) [Help]  
Click this to browse the HELP for the printer driver.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
217  
       
— Setup Tab  
The Setup tab contains basic print operation settings, such as original paper size, print paper  
size, paper source, paper type, orientation, number of copies, and so on. Also this tab allows you  
to enable enlarge/reduce printing, sort printing, stapling and punching, and 2-sided printing.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
1) Original Paper Size  
This selects the size of a document to be printed.  
Available original paper sizes are listed below:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Letter  
Ledger  
Legal  
Statement  
Computer  
(12 x 18”)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A4  
A3  
A3-Wide  
A5  
A6  
•
•
•
•
•
Folio  
13” LG  
8.5” SQ  
8K  
•
•
•
•
•
Envelope COM10  
Envelope Monarch  
Envelope DL  
Envelope Cho-3  
Envelope You-4  
16K  
B4  
B5  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
•
The default paper size will be “Letter” or “A4” according to the regional setting in the  
Windows.  
“A3-Wide” is displayed only for the european version, and “(12 x 18”)” is displayed  
only for the US version.  
“(12 x 18”)” and “A3-Wide” are not available when the Single-staple Finisher is  
installed.  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
“Envelope COM10”, “Envelope Monarch”, “Envelope DL”, “Envelope Cho-3”, and “Enve-  
lope You-4” are not available for e-STUDIO4511 Series.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
“A3-Wide” and “(12 x 18”)” are not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
218  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
     
2) Manual Scale  
Check this box to manually enter the zoom ratio, to enlarge or reduce an image. You can set  
any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom ratio. This is not available when you enable the  
Booklet printing.  
3) Print Paper Size  
Select this to enlarge or reduce a page image to fit exactly in the selected paper size. If you  
do not enable enlarge or reduce printing, select “Same as Original Paper Size”.  
Also when you want to enable Tab printing, select “Letter Tab” or “A4 Tab” here. When  
you select “Letter Tab” or “A4 Tab”, the Primary Tab dialog box appears.  
„
Primary Tab Dialog  
Tab Manufacturer  
Select the product name of the tab paper that you use. This equipment supports following  
tab paper.  
For Letter Tab:  
Blanks USA copy Tabs (5 Banks) LT + 1/2” Tab  
Blanks USA copy Tabs (8 Banks) LT + 1/2” Tab  
For A4 Tab:  
KOKUYO A4-S (5 Banks)  
King JIM A4-S (5Banks)  
If you use other tab papers than above, select “Custom”. When you select “Custom”, you  
must specify the tab extension manually.  
Tab Extension  
Enter the width of the tab extension. This must be set only when “Custom” is selected in the  
“Tab Manufacturer” option.  
Image Shift Width  
Enter the width to shift the printed image.  
For example, if you want to print a text on the tab extension of Letter Tab paper, create a Let-  
ter sized document and input the text on the right side. You must place the text in the height  
exactly to fit to the tab extension. Also the right margin, a margin between the text and right  
edge of the document, must have more than 0.08 inch or 2 mm space because the equipment  
cannot print in the space. Then enter the width of the tab extension as Image Shift Width.  
Width of Tab Extension = Image Shift Margin  
More than 0.08" or 2mm  
Document  
Printed Image  
Must exactly  
fit the tab extension  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
219  
   
Unit  
Select the unit for the Tab Extension and Image Shift option. The default unit varies depend-  
ing on the regional setting of the client computer.  
NOTES:  
•
The tab paper can be fed only from the Bypass Tray. When you enable tab printing,  
place the tab paper on the Bypass Tray. When you place the tab paper on the  
Bypass Tray, make sure the tab side of the paper becomes outside.  
Place the tab paper  
so that the tab side  
becomes outside.  
•
•
•
If the document for tab printing is not created properly or the Image Shift Width is  
not set properly, the image will not be printed in the correct position within the tab  
extension. Please make sure to create the document and set the Image Shift Width  
correctly.  
If mis-printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously, dirt may  
adhere to the reverse side of a paper. To avoid this, it is recommended to print a tab  
paper as a separated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning  
before printing next tab paper.  
When printing tab paper, the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray  
because the roller to deliver the tab extension does not exit. In that case, remove  
the tab paper before printing a next job.  
4) Paper Source  
This selects the paper source. Please select a paper source that correlates with the printing  
size.  
•
Automatic — Automatically selects the paper set in this equipment according to the  
printed document size.  
•
•
•
Upper Drawer — Paper is fed from the Upper Drawer.  
Lower Drawer — Paper is fed from the Lower Drawer.  
Pedestal Upper Drawer — Paper is fed from the Pedestal Upper Drawer. This cannot  
be selected if a Pedestal 1 or 2 are not installed.  
•
•
•
Pedestal Lower Drawer — Paper is fed from the Pedestal Lower Drawer. This cannot  
be selected if a Pedestal 2 is not installed.  
Large Capacity Feeder — Paper is fed from the Large Capacity Feeder. This cannot be  
selected if a Large Capacity Feeder is not installed.  
Sheet Feed Bypass — Paper is fed from the Bypass Tray.  
NOTE:  
•
The selectable values vary depending on the optional devices installed on this  
equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
5) Paper Type  
This sets the media type of the paper.  
2
•
•
•
Plain — Select this when printing on 20 lbs plain paper (64-80 g/m plain paper).  
2
Thick1 — Select this when printing on 24-28 lbs thick paper (81-105 g/m thick paper).  
2
Thick2 — Select this when printing on 32-90 lbs thick paper (106-163 g/m thick  
paper).  
2
•
Thick3 — Select this when printing on 110 lbs thick paper (164-209 g/m thick paper).  
220  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
   
•
•
Transparency — Select this when printing on transparent sheets.  
Envelope — This is selected when you select the Envelope paper size at the “Original  
Paper Size” drop down box.  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO450 Series:  
“Envelope” is not available for e-STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO450 Series.  
6) Orientation  
This sets the paper printing direction.  
•
•
Portrait — The document is printed in the portrait direction.  
Landscape — The document is printed in the landscape direction.  
7) Number of Copies  
This sets the number of printed copies. You can set any integer from 1 to 999.  
8) Copy Handling  
This sets how to sort the printed sheet when numerous copies are made for printing.  
•
•
•
Sort Copies — Select this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...).  
Group Copies — Select this for group-printing (1, 1, 1... 2, 2, 2... 3, 3, 3...).  
Rotated Sort Copies — Select this for rotate sort-printing.  
NOTE:  
•
•
•
“Group Copies” and “Rotated Sort Copies” can be selected only when more than 2  
copies are entered at the Number of Copies option.  
“Rotated Sort Copies” can be selected only when “Letter”, “A4”, or “B5” is selected  
at the Output Paper Size option.  
When “Rotate Sort Copies” is selected, the Resolution option in the Image Quality  
tab will be “600 x 600 dpi” and the selection will be disabled.  
9) Color  
This sets whether a print job is printed in color mode or monochrome mode.  
•
Automatic — Select this to determine the color mode automatically. When a print job  
is a black and white document, the system automatically prints the document in mono-  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
221  
             
chrome mode. When a print job is a color document, it prints the document in color  
mode.  
•
Mono — Select this to print a document in monochrome mode.  
NOTE:  
•
Only “Mono” can be selected for PCL6 printer driver because the PCL6 printer  
driver only supports black and white printing.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Color” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
10) Staple  
This sets whether a print job is printed with staples.  
•
•
None — Select this to print without staples.  
Upper Left — Select this to staple in the upper left and print.  
•
•
•
Center Top — Select this to staple double in the upper side and print.  
Upper Right — Select this to staple in the upper right and print.  
Middle Left — Select this to staple double in the left and print.  
222  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
•
Center Double — Select this to fold and staple double in the center. When you select  
this, the pages will be printed on the sheets according to the print option settings, and  
then simply fold and staple double in the center of the sheets.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
NOTES:  
•
“Center Double” can be used to create a booklet from a document that has been  
already created as a paginated booklet. To create a paginated booklet from a nor-  
mal document, perform the booklet printing.  
P.230 "Layout Tab - Booklet Window"  
•
•
•
The selectable options vary depending on the paper size.  
“None” can only be selected if a finisher is not installed.  
“Upper Left” and “Upper Right” can be selected only when the Single-staple Fin-  
isher, Multi-staple Finisher, or Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed and configured on  
the Configuration tab.  
•
“Center Top” and “Middle Left” can be selected only when the Multi-staple Finisher  
or Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab.  
“None” can only be selected when the Booklet printing is set at the Layout tab.  
“None” can only be selected when Tab printing is enabled.  
•
•
11) Hole Punch  
This sets whether a print job is printed with hole punches.  
•
•
None — Select this to print without hole punches.  
Center Top — Select this to create holes on the upper side and print.  
•
Middle Left — Select this to create holes on the left side and print.  
NOTE:  
•
•
•
“None” can only be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed.  
“None” can only be selected when the Booklet printing is set at the Layout tab.  
“None” can only be selected when Tab printing is enabled.  
12) 2-Sided Printing  
This sets 2-Sided printing (printing on both sides of paper) according to the type of binding  
for 2-sided-printed pages.  
This option is only for printing on both sides of the paper. If you want to bind the output with  
staples, you should set the finishing option as well.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
223  
   
•
•
None — Select this if you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.  
Book — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in the same direction and to bind  
the document along the vertical side of the paper so that the pages can be turned over  
right and left.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
•
Tablet — Select this to print on both sides of the paper with a vertical reversal and to  
bind the document along the horizontal side of the paper so that the pages can be turned  
over up and down.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
NOTES:  
•
“Book” or “Tablet” will be automatically selected when the Booklet printing is set at  
the Layout tab.  
•
•
“None” can only be selected when Tab printing is enabled.  
This option is disabled when the ADU is not installed.  
— Print Job Tab  
The Print Job tab contains job type settings that select the way this equipment handles a print  
job. This tab allows you to enable various job types such as Scheduled Print, Private Print, and  
Proof Print. You can also print a document as an overlay file, or store to e-filing.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1) Normal Print  
Select this to print a job normally.  
2) Scheduled Print  
Select this to print a job at a future date and time.  
When this is selected, click [Edit] to set the date and time to print a job.  
224  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
       
3) Private Print  
Select this to print a private job. When you select this, enter a 5-digit password in the Docu-  
ment ID number field.  
The print job, sent as a private job, is saved in the private job queue on this equipment, and is  
not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option is useful  
when you want to print a confidential document that is secured by a password. The user has  
to enter the password to print the private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel  
Display.  
4) Proof Print  
Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval before print-  
ing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job, is saved in the proof job queue  
on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until you activate printing from  
the Touch Panel Display. This option allows you to check a job’s output before printing the  
remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste.  
5) Print to Overlay File  
When this is selected, the print job is saved as an overlay file that is imposed on other docu-  
ments. For example, if you want to print a master page image on the background of a docu-  
ment, you can create overlay file of master merge image using this option. Then you can  
print a document using this overlay by specifying this file as an overlay image in the “Use  
Overlay Image” option at the Effect tab.  
NOTES:  
•
•
If the print job has several pages in the document, only the first page of the docu-  
ment will be saved as an overlay file.  
Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay  
image must be created at the same size, orientation, color mode, and resolution.  
6) Store to e-Filing  
Select this to save a job to a Box. When this is selected, select the box from the drop down  
menu on the right. If the printer driver connects to this equipment via SMB, it detects the  
available Box numbers and Box name in the drop down box. If not, all Box numbers are  
listed in the drop down box.  
If you select a user box, you may be required to enter the password for the selected box. The  
job saved to a Box can be printed from the Touch Panel Display at a later time. It can also be  
composed with other documents using the e-Filing web utility.  
You can also print a job and save it to a box by checking on the “Print” option.  
NOTE:  
•
•
When you store a document in e-Filing using the printer driver, the printing image  
(not the original document in your computer) will be stored in e-Filing.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
For more information about e-Filing operations, see e-Filing Guide.  
7) Destination  
This selects the destination tray to which jobs will be output.  
•
•
Inner Tray — Select this to route the output to the inner tray.  
Job Separator Upper — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Job Sep-  
arator. (e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series Only)  
•
Job Separator Lower — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Job Sep-  
arator. (e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series Only)  
•
•
Tray 1 — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher.  
Tray 2 — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher.  
NOTES:  
•
For e-STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO450 Series, “Tray 1” and “Tray 2” are only  
available when the Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher, or Saddle-stitch Fin-  
isher are installed and configured on the Configuration tab.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
225  
           
•
For e-STUDIO280 Series, “Tray 1” and “Tray 2” are only available when the Sin-  
gle-staple Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab, and “Tray 1”  
is only available when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the  
Configuration tab.  
•
•
If you select “Rotated Sort Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down box in the  
Setup tab, only “Inner Tray” can be selected.  
When the optional Job Separator is installed and configured on the Configuration  
tab, you can select “Job Separator Upper” and “Job Separator Lower” instead of  
“Inner Tray”.  
8) Department  
Enter the user’s department code if the system is managed with department codes. Please  
ask your administrator for your department code.  
NOTE:  
•
•
If the number of the printed sheets for a print job exceeds the output limitation for  
the entered department code, the print job is stored in the invalid department code  
print job list without printing. When you want to print the print job, perform printing  
from the [JOB STATUS] button in the Control Panel by entering another department  
code of which the output limitation is more than the number of printed sheets.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which  
no department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on  
the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis-  
trator mode and whether the SNMP Communication is enabled or not. When the  
SNMP Communication and Department Code Enforcement are enabled, an error  
message will be displayed when entering the invalid department code. When the  
SNMP Communication is disabled and Department Code Enforcement is enabled,  
the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code  
print job list without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled,  
the invalid department code print job will be printed.  
However, when using Windows NT 4.0 and configure the connection through a Net-  
Ware print server, an error message for entering the invalid department code will not  
be displayed even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Commu-  
nication is enabled.  
— Layout Tab - Standard Window  
The standard window of the Layout tab allows you to enable Front Cover printing, Back Cover  
printing, Inserting Pages, and Interleaving Pages for a normal layout print job.  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
Front Cover printing is also available with Booklet printing. If can be set in the Book-  
let window.  
Front Cover printing, Back Cover printing, and Inserting Page are also available with  
N-up printing. They can be set in the Multiple Pages per Sheet window.  
226  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
       
NOTE:  
•
Cover printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled.  
1
2
3
4
1) Use Front Cover  
This sets front cover printing which allows you to insert or print a cover on a sheet fed from  
a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab.  
To enable cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a cover sheet  
is to be fed and the print style to be used.  
Source  
Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
•
•
•
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Print Style  
This selects how you want to print a cover.  
•
•
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page image on the front side of a  
cover.  
•
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two page images on both  
sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is enabled on  
the Setup tab.  
If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the first  
page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and the back side of the cover  
will be blank.  
2) Use Back Cover  
This sets back cover printing which allows you to insert or print a back cover on a sheet fed  
from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab.  
To enable back cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a back  
cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used.  
Source  
Select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed.  
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Print Style  
This selects how you want to print a back cover.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
227  
   
•
•
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the last page image on the front side of a  
cover.  
•
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the last two page images on both  
sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is enabled on  
the Setup tab.  
NOTES:  
•
•
If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the last  
page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be  
blank.  
If “Print on both sides of page” is selected but there is only one page printed on the  
back cover, the last page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back  
side of the cover will be blank.  
3) Insert Page  
This sets sheet insertion printing which allows you to insert a sheet between pages, or print a  
specific page on a sheet fed from a tray other than the Paper Source option selected on the  
Setup tab.  
This option is useful when you want to insert a blank sheet between chapters, or when you  
want to print chapter cover pages on the different paper.  
To enable sheet insertion printing, check on the box and select the location from where  
inserted sheets are to be fed and the print style to be used. Then, enter the page number you  
want to insert in the Pages field.  
Source  
Select the location from where insertion sheets are to be fed.  
NOTE:  
•
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Print Style  
This selects how you want to print on insertion sheets.  
•
•
Do not print on page — Select this to insert blank sheets.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the specified pages on the front side of the  
insertion sheets.  
•
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the specified pages on both sides of  
the insertion sheets. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is enabled  
on the Setup tab.  
Pages  
Enter the page number where the sheet is to be inserted. To enter multiple pages, separate  
page numbers with commas.  
When “Do not print on page” is selected from the Print Style drop down box, the blank sheet  
is inserted before the entered pages.  
When “Print on 1 side of page” is selected from the Print Style drop down box, entered page  
will be printed on the inserted sheet.  
When “Print on both sides of page” is selected from the Print Style drop down box, entered  
page and the next page will be printed on both sides of the inserted sheet.  
228  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
NOTES:  
•
If “Do not print on page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and you  
enter an even numbered page (printed on the back side of the paper) for the Pages  
field, the specified page will be blank. The desired blank sheet is inserted next and  
the 2-sided printing continues from the next page.  
5
4
Blank Sheet  
Blank  
3
2
1
•
If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, the spec-  
ified page is printed on the front side of the sheet and back side of the sheet will be  
blank.  
5
4
Blank  
3
2
1
•
If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and you  
enter an even numbered page (printed on the back side of the paper) for the Pages  
field, the specified page will be blank. The page is printed on the front side of the  
inserted sheet and the 2-sided printing continues from the next page.  
6
5
Blank  
4
Blank  
3
2
1
•
If “Print on both sides of page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and  
you enter an even numbered page (printed on the back side of the paper) for the  
Pages field, the specified page will be blank. The specified page and the next page  
are printed on the inserted sheet and the 2-sided printing continues from the next  
page.  
7
6
5
4
Blank  
3
2
1
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
229  
4) Interleave Pages  
This sets the interleaving page feature that is useful when you want to insert paper of a dif-  
ferent type (or from another source) between every page of your print job. For example, you  
could use this option to insert blank, colored sheets between overhead transparencies.  
To enable interleaving pages, check on the box and select the location from where sheets are  
to be fed.  
Source  
Select the location from where the interleaving sheet is to be fed.  
NOTE:  
•
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Duplicate  
When you check on this, you can print previous page images on the inserted sheet.  
— Layout Tab - Booklet Window  
In the Booklet window, you can print a properly paginated booklet or magazine-style publica-  
tion. You can even create bound booklets that are folded and stapled in the center.  
NOTES:  
•
•
Booklet printing is available only when the ADU is installed.  
Booklet printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1) Output Document Layout  
Select the booklet size to be made.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
A5 on A4 — Select this to print a A5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on A4  
paper to fit on half a sheet (A5).  
A4 on A3 — Select this to print a A4 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on A3  
paper to fit on half a sheet (A4).  
B5 on B4 — Select this to print a B5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on B4  
paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).  
Letter-Half on Letter — Select this to print a 1/2 Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are  
printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet.  
LT on LD — Select this to print a Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on Led-  
ger paper to fit on half a sheet (Letter).  
A6 on A5 — Select this to print a A6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on A5  
paper to fit on half a sheet (A6).  
230  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
         
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
B6 on B5 — Select this to print a B6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on B5  
paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).  
1/2 LG on LG — Select this to print a 1/2 Legal size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed  
on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 Comp on Comp — Select this to print a 1/2 Computer size booklet. Every 2 pages  
are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 Folio on Folio — Select this to print a 1/2 Folio size booklet. Every 2 pages are  
printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 Statement on Statement — Select this to print a 1/2 Statement size booklet. Every  
2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 13’LG on 13’LG — Select this to print a 1/2 13inchLG size booklet. Every 2 pages  
are printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 8.5’SQ on 8.5’SQ — Select this to print a 1/2 8.5inchSQ size booklet. Every 2  
pages are printed on 8.5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet.  
32K on 16K — Select this to print a 32K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on  
16K paper to fit on half a sheet.  
16K on 8K — Select this to print a 16K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on 8K  
paper to fit on half a sheet.  
2) Center Margin  
This sets the gutter on the center of two sided page. You can enter up to 0.500 inch (12.700  
mm).  
3) Outer Margin  
This sets the gutter on the right side and left side on the paper. You can enter up to 1.00 inch  
(25.40 mm).  
4) Units  
Select the unit for the Center Margin and Outer Margin option. The default unit varies  
depending on the regional setting in the Windows.  
5) Staple Down the Center  
Check this to staple double in the center.  
NOTES:  
•
“Staple Down the Center” is available only when “A5 on A4”, “A4 on A3”, “B5 on B4”,  
“1/2 LT on LT”, “LT on LD”, or “16K on 8K” is selected at the Output Document Lay-  
out drop down box and the Saddle-stitch finisher is installed.  
6) Number Pages from Right to Left  
Check this to print a booklet that can be read from right to left.  
7) Use Front Cover  
This sets front cover printing for a booklet which allows you to insert or print a cover on a  
sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab.  
To enable cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a cover sheet  
is to be fed and the print style.  
Source  
Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed.  
NOTE:  
•
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Print Style  
This selects how you want to print a cover.  
•
•
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.  
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages and last two pages  
on both sides of a cover.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
231  
         
NOTE:  
•
If “Print on both sides of page” is selected but there is only one page for the last  
page printed on the cover, the last page is printed inside of the back cover page and  
the back cover page will be blank.  
232  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
— Layout Tab - Multiple Pages per Sheet Window  
In the Multiple Pages per Sheet window, you can enable N-up printing.  
NOTE:  
•
N-up printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled.  
1
2
3
4
5
1) Number of pages per sheet  
This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit the  
selected paper size automatically and printed.  
•
2 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged left to right  
(when the orientation is portrait) or from top to bottom (when the orientation is land-  
scape) on one sheet.  
•
2 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged right to left  
(when the orientation is portrait) or from bottom to top (when the orientation is land-  
scape) on one sheet.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally  
from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
4 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally  
from the right and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
4 pages: Left to Right by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged  
vertically from the top and printed left to right on one sheet.  
4 pages: Right to Left by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged  
vertically from the top and printed right to left on one sheet.  
6 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged horizontally  
from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
8 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 8 pages arranged horizontally  
from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
9 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged horizontally  
from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
16 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged horizon-  
tally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
2) Draw Border Around Pages  
Check this to print borders each page.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
233  
         
3) Use Front Cover  
This sets front cover printing for N-up printing which allows you to insert or print a cover on  
a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab.  
To enable cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a cover sheet  
is to be fed and the print style to be used.  
Source  
Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
•
•
•
•
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Print Style  
This selects how you want to print a cover.  
•
•
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page image on the front side of a  
cover.  
•
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two page images on both  
sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is enabled on  
the Setup tab.  
If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the first  
page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be  
blank.  
4) Use Back Cover  
This sets back cover printing which allows you to insert or print a back cover on a sheet fed  
from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab.  
To enable back cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a back  
cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used.  
Source  
Select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed.  
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Print Style  
This selects how you want to print a back cover.  
•
•
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the last page image on the front side of a  
cover.  
•
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the last two page images on both  
sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is enabled on  
the Setup tab.  
If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the last  
page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be  
blank.  
5) Interleave Pages  
This sets the interleaving page feature when you want to insert paper of a different type (or  
from another source) between every page of your print job. For example, you could use this  
option to insert blank, colored sheets between overhead transparencies.  
To enable interleaving pages, check on the box and select the location from where sheets are  
to be fed.  
Source  
Select the location from where a interleaving sheet is to be fed.  
234  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
     
NOTE:  
•
The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional  
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.  
Duplicate  
When you check on this, you can print previous page images on the inserted sheet.  
— Effect Tab  
The Effect Tab contains print options that add effects to your print jobs such as Watermarks,  
Overlay Image printing, Rotate printing, Mirror printing, and Negative printing. Also it lets you  
enable Toner Save and Smoothing functions.  
Effect Tab for PCL5c and PCL6  
1
2
3
6
7
Effect Tab for PS3  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1) Watermark  
This selects the watermark to be used or edited. The following values except “None” are the  
default watermarks that have been registered in the printer driver. New watermarks you cre-  
ate are added to the drop down box list.  
•
None - Select this if no watermark is desired.  
The following default watermarks are also displayed in the drop down box:  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
235  
     
•
•
•
•
•
TOP SECRET  
CONFIDENTIAL  
DRAFT  
ORIGINAL  
COPY  
[Add]  
Click this to create new watermark. The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking on this.  
P.237 "Add/Edit Watermark"  
[Edit]  
Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down box and click it to edit the watermark.  
The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking on this.  
P.237 "Add/Edit Watermark"  
[Delete]  
Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down box and click it to edit a watermark.  
NOTES:  
•
•
The default watermarks can be deleted but, If deleted, they cannot be restored.  
“None” cannot be deleted.  
Print on first page only  
Check this to print a watermark on the first page only. This setting will become available  
when any watermark is selected from the Watermark drop down box.  
2) Use Overlay Image  
Check on this to print a job with an overlay image. This feature allows you to print an image  
on the background of a print job, although the watermark allows only a text.  
To enable Overlay Image, check the check box and click [Browse] to select the overlay file.  
NOTE:  
•
•
Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay  
image must be created at the same size, orientation, color mode, and resolution.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
If you want use an overlay image in your job, you must first create an overlay file.  
To create an overlay image, create an overlay image with most applications and  
print it as an overlay file. You can enable creating an overlay file on the Print Job  
Tab.  
P.225 "Print to Overlay File"  
3) Rotate 180 degrees  
Check on this to perform rotation printing of an image.  
4) Mirror  
Check on this to perform mirror printing of an image. This print option is available only for  
the PS3 printer driver.  
NOTE:  
•
The mirror printing may not be applied when the application gives priority to the  
application’s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings.  
5) Negative/Positive  
Check on this to perform negative printing of an image. This print option is available only  
for the PS3 printer driver.  
NOTES:  
•
•
The Negative/Positive option is not available when “Automatic” is selected at the  
“Color” drop down box in the Setup tab.  
The negative printing may not be applied when the application gives priority to the  
application’s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings.  
6) Toner Save  
Check this to print in toner save mode.  
236  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
         
7) Do not Print Blank Page  
Check this ignore blank pages for printing.  
8) [PostScript Settings]  
Click this to specify the PostScript specific functions. The PostScript Settings dialog box  
appears by clicking on this. This print option is available only for the PS3 printer driver.  
P.238 "PostScript Settings"  
Add/Edit Watermark  
When you click [Add] or [Edit], the Watermark dialog box appears and you can create new  
watermark or edit selected watermarks.  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1
2
11  
3
12  
13  
4
1) X Position  
The horizontal position of a watermark is displayed. You can change the position using the  
vertical scroll bar.  
2) Y Position  
The vertical position of a watermark is displayed. You can change the position using the  
horizontal scroll bar.  
3) Units  
Select the unit for the “X Position” and “Y Position” field.  
4) [Center Watermark]  
Click this to automatically move the watermark position to the center.  
5) Caption  
Enter the text of a watermark. You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters. When you  
are editing a watermark, the selected watermark text is displayed in the field.  
6) Font Name  
Select a font to be used for the watermark text.  
7) Style  
Select the font style for the watermark text.  
•
•
•
•
Regular — Select this to set the regular style to the text.  
Bold — Select this to set the bold style to the text.  
Italic — Select this to set the italic style to the text.  
Bold Italic — Select this to set the bold and italic style to the text.  
8) Color  
Select a color of watermark text. If the color that you require is not listed in the drop down  
box, click [Browse] to add new color.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
237  
       
NOTES:  
•
•
When “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down box on the Setup Tab, this option  
will be disabled.  
This option is disabled for the PCL6 printer driver because it supports only black and  
white printing.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Color” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
9) Font Size  
Enter the font size for the watermark text. The font size can be set from 6 to 300 pt in units  
of 1 pt. You can also set the font size using the scroll bar.  
10) Angle  
Enter the degree of angle for rotating the watermark text. The angle can be set from -90 to 90  
degrees in units of 1 degree. You can also set the degree of angle by moving the scroll bar.  
11) Solid  
Select this to print solid type of watermark.  
12) Draw as Outline  
Select this to print outline type of watermark.  
13) Transparency  
Select this to transparent watermark. When you select this, set the brightness from 0  
(darker) to 100% (lighter) in units of 1%. You can also set the brightness using the scroll  
bar.  
PostScript Settings  
1
2
3
4
1) Output Format  
This selects the output format for printing.  
•
•
•
•
ASCII — The job is sent in the ASCII data format.  
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) - The job is sent in the EPS format.  
Tagged BCP — Select this to send a job in Tagged Binary format over parallel ports.  
Using Adobe DSC — Select this to send a job with the DSC comments.  
2) Print Error Information  
Check on this to print a PS error information page when any errors occur for printing.  
3) Compress Bitmap  
Check on this to send compress bitmaps to this equipment.  
4) Use PostScript Passthrough  
Check this for PostScript data created by the application to be passed through to this equip-  
ment.  
238  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
           
— Image Quality Tab  
The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed. You can easily select  
appropriate image quality depending on the type of a document. Setting items in the Image  
Quality Tab vary with the type of printer drivers.  
For PCL5c Printer Driver  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The PCL5c Printer Driver is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
1) Image Quality Type  
This sets how colors are printed by selecting the job type. The printer driver automatically  
applies proper color quality for selected job type.  
•
General — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing a general color docu-  
ment.  
•
•
•
Photograph — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing photos.  
Presentation — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a vivid document.  
Line Art — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a document contains a  
lot of characters or line arts.  
NOTE:  
•
The Image Quality type option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the  
“Color” drop down box on the Setup tab.  
2) Halftone  
This sets how halftone colors are printed.  
•
Default — Select this to print halftone properly for a job type which is selected at  
“Image Quality Type”.  
•
•
Detail — Select this to print halftone in detail.  
Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.  
NOTE:  
•
Only “Detail” and “Smooth” can be selected when “Mono” is selected at the “Color”  
drop down box on the Setup tab.  
3) Resolution  
This sets the resolution for printing.  
•
•
600 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 600 x 600 dpi.  
1200 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 1200 x 600 dpi.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
239  
         
NOTE:  
•
•
•
“1200 x 600 dpi” is available only when the optional expansion memory is installed  
and configured on the Configuration tab.  
“1200 x 600 dpi” cannot be selected when “Save to e-Filing” is selected on the Print  
Job tab.  
The Resolution option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box on the Setup tab.  
4) Brightness  
Enter the percentage of brightness for printing. You can set from -100 (darkest) to 100 (light-  
est) in units of 1%. You can also set the percentage of brightness by moving the scroll bar.  
NOTE:  
•
The Brightness option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box on the Setup tab.  
5) Saturation  
Enter the percentage of saturation for printing. You can set from -100 (low clear) to 100  
(high clear) in units of 1%. You can also set the percentage of saturation by moving the  
scroll bar.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
•
•
The Saturation option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box on the Setup tab.  
6) Smoothing  
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.  
The Smoothing option is only available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box on the Setup tab.  
7) Distinguish Thin Lines  
Check this to print thin lines clearly.  
8) Pure Gray  
Check this to print the contents in gray scale where the percentage of each color —cyan,  
magenta, and yellow— is the same percentage (C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).  
NOTE:  
•
The Pure Gray option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box in the Setup tab.  
9) Use Black for All Text  
Check this to print all texts in 100% black except white texts.  
240  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
           
For PCL6 Printer Driver  
1
2
3
4
5
1) Halftone  
This sets how halftone are printed.  
•
Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.  
2) Resolution  
This sets the resolution for printing. “600 x 600 dpi” is only available for the PCL6 printer  
driver.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Resolution” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
3) Smoothing  
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.  
4) Distinguish Thin Lines  
Check this to print thin lines clearly.  
5) Use Black for All Text  
Check this to print all texts in 100% black except white texts.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
241  
         
For PS3 Printer Driver  
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
1) Image Quality Type  
This sets how colors are printed by selecting the job type. The printer driver automatically  
applies proper color quality for selected job type.  
•
General — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing a general color docu-  
ment.  
•
•
•
Photograph — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing photos.  
Presentation — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a vivid document.  
Line Art — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a document contains a  
lot of characters and line arts.  
NOTE:  
•
The Image Quality Type option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the  
“Color” drop down box on the Setup tab.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Image Quality Type” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
2) Halftone  
This sets how halftone colors are printed.  
•
Default — Select this to print halftone properly for a job type which is selected at  
“Image Quality Type”.  
•
•
Detail — Select this to print halftone in detail.  
Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.  
NOTES:  
•
•
Only “Detail” and “Smooth” can be selected when “Mono” is selected at the “Color”  
drop down box on the Setup tab.  
Only “Detail” and “Smooth” can be selected for e-STUDIO450 Series and  
e-STUDIO280 Series.  
3) Resolution  
This sets the resolution for printing.  
•
•
600 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 600 x 600 dpi.  
1200 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 1200 x 600 dpi.  
242  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
     
NOTE:  
•
•
•
“1200 x 600 dpi” is available only when the optional expansion memory is installed  
and configured on the Configuration tab.  
“1200 x 600 dpi” cannot be selected when “Save to e-Filing” is selected on the Print  
Job tab.  
The Resolution option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box on the Setup tab.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Resolution” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
4) Smoothing  
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.  
NOTE:  
•
The Smoothing option is only available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box on the Setup tab.  
5) Distinguish Thin Lines  
Check this to print thin lines clearly.  
6) Black Over Print  
Check this to print background contents and then overlay black content on it. If this is not  
checked, the background of the black content is not printed. It may remain a white because  
the black content may shift and be printed. When you print a document that has any content  
on the background with black texts overlayed, check this option.  
NOTE:  
•
The Black Over Print option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color”  
drop down box on the Setup tab.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Black Over Print” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
7) Pure Black  
Check this to print the contents in black where the percentage of all color —cyan, magenta,  
and yellow— is 100% (C=M=Y=100% -> K=100%).  
NOTE:  
•
The Pure Black option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box in the Setup tab.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Pure Black” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
8) Pure Gray  
Check this to print the contents in gray scale where the percentage of each color —cyan,  
magenta, and yellow— is the same percentage (C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).  
NOTE:  
•
The Pure Gray option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop  
down box in the Setup tab.  
•
The Pure Gray option is not available when the Pure Black option is not enabled.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
243  
         
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Pure Gray” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
9) Use Black for All Text  
Check this to print all texts in 100% black except white texts.  
— Font Tab  
The Fonts tab allows you to select how the TrueType fonts are printed. The following figure is  
the Font Tab for the PS3 printer driver.  
1
2
3
NOTE:  
•
The Fonts tab can be displayed only from the Printers folder (and not displayed  
when displaying the properties from the application’s Print dialog box).  
1) TrueType Options  
This sets how to print TrueType fonts.  
•
•
•
Always Use TrueType Fonts — Select this to print the document the same as the print  
image shown on the screen. All TrueType fonts are extracted on the system for printing.  
Always Use Printer Fonts — Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts with the inter-  
nal fonts for printing. The print result may differ from the print image on the screen.  
Use Font Substitution Table — Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts using the  
internal fonts according to the settings of the font substitution table. You can edit the  
font substitution table that is displayed at the Substitution Table Edit table.  
Download as Bitmap — Select this to print the document as same as the image shown  
on the screen.  
•
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
The default value will be “Use Font Substitution Table” for the PS3 printer driver.  
244  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
       
2) Substitution Table Edit  
This table shows how each TrueType font is substituted. You can edit the substitution setting  
for each TrueType font. In this table, the TrueType font names are displayed in the TrueType  
Font column, and how the TrueType font is printed is shown in the Use Printer Font column.  
To edit the substitution table, select the TrueType font that you want to edit from the table,  
and select how the TrueType font is printed at the Printer Font For drop down box.  
At the Printer Font For drop down box, you can select “Download as Soft Font” to send the  
TrueType fonts in Type 42 format, or other available printer fonts to be substituted. The  
printer fonts displayed in the drop down box differ depending on the TrueType fonts.  
3) [Run Font Manager]  
Click this to run the Agfa Font Manager. This is not available if the Agfa Font Manager is  
not installed.  
P.368 "Managing Fonts with Font Manager"  
NOTE:  
•
The [Run Font Manager] button is not displayed for the PCL5c and PCL6 printer  
driver.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
245  
   
— Configuration Tab  
The Configuration Tab allows you to configure options. When any optional unit is installed in  
this equipment, set the configuration of the machine on this tab.  
Configuration Tab for e-STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO450 Series  
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Configuration Tab for e-STUDIO280 Series  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1) Pedestal  
This sets whether or not the optional pedestals or large capacity feeder is installed.  
The selections vary depending on the equipment model.  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO450 Series:  
•
•
•
•
None — Select this when neither pedestal nor large capacity is installed.  
Large Capacity Feeder — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.  
Pedestal 1 — Select this when the upper pedestal is installed.  
Pedestal 2 — Select this when both upper pedestal and lower pedestal are installed.  
For e-STUDIO280 Series:  
•
•
1 Drawer — Select this when only the first drawer is installed.  
1 Drawer & Large Capacity Feeder — Select this when the first drawer and the Large  
Capacity Feeder is installed.  
246  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
     
•
•
1 Drawer & Pedestal 1 — Select this when the first drawer and the upper pedestal is  
installed.  
1 Drawer & Pedestal 2 — Select this when the first drawer and both upper pedestal and  
lower pedestal are installed.  
•
•
2 Drawers — Select this when the first and second drawers are installed.  
2 Drawers & Large Capacity Feeder — Select this when 2 drawers and the Large  
Capacity Feeder is installed.  
•
•
2 Drawers & Pedestal 1 — Select this when 2 drawers and the upper pedestal is  
installed.  
2 Drawers & Pedestal 2 — Select this when 2 drawers and both upper pedestal and  
lower pedestal are installed.  
2) Finisher  
This sets whether or not the optional finisher is installed.  
•
•
•
None — Select this when finisher is not installed.  
Hanging Finisher — Select this when the Single-staple Finisher is installed.  
Finisher — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher is installed (for e-STUDIO450  
Series and e-STUDIO4511 Series only).  
•
•
Saddle Stitch Finisher — Select this when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
Job Separator — Select this when the Job Separator is installed (for e-STUDIO450  
Series and e-STUDIO280 Series only).  
•
Offset Stacker — Select this when the Offset Stacker is installed (for e-STUDIO450  
Series and e-STUDIO280 Series only).  
3) Hole Punch Unit  
This sets whether or not the optional hole punch unit is installed.  
•
•
•
•
•
None — Select this when hole punch unit is not installed.  
2 Holes — Select this when the 2 hole punch unit is installed.  
2/3 Holes — Select this when the 2/3 hole punch unit is installed.  
4 Holes (F) — Select this when the 4 hole (F) punch unit is installed.  
4 Holes (S) — Select this when the 4 hole (S) punch unit is installed.  
4) Auto Duplexer  
This sets whether or not the optional automatic duplexer is installed. This is available only  
for e-STUDIO280 Series.  
•
•
None — Select this when the optional automatic duplexer is not installed.  
Installed — Select this when the optional automatic duplexer is installed.  
5) Upper Drawer/Paper Type  
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the upper drawer.  
6) Lower Drawer/Paper Type  
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the lower drawer.  
7) Pedestal Upper/Paper Type  
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the upper pedestal. This can be set only when  
the upper pedestal is installed.  
8) Pedestal Lower/Paper Type  
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the lower pedestal. This can be set only when  
the lower pedestal is installed.  
9) Large Capacity/Paper Type  
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the Large Capacity Feeder. This can be set only  
when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.  
10) Bypass Feeder/Paper Type  
This sets the paper type set in the Stack Feed Bypass.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
247  
                 
11) Memory  
Select the size of memory installed.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
Only “32MB” is selectable for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
12) Enable SNMP Communication  
Check this to enable obtaining the configuration information from this equipment.  
13) [Update Now]  
Click this to obtain the configuration information from this equipment immediately. This is  
available only when “Enable SNMP Communication” is checked.  
NOTE:  
•
If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly, the message  
“The address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be  
displayed when you click [Update Now]. If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for  
the equipment using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box. After  
searching the equipment, the SNMP communication will be enabled. For the  
instructions on how to search the equipment, refer to the instructions of TopAccess-  
DocMon.  
P.335 "Searching for a Printer"  
14) Update Automatically  
Check this to update the configuration information every time the printer driver is opened.  
This is available only when “Enable SNMP Communication” is checked.  
NOTE:  
•
If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly, the message  
“The address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be  
displayed when the Configuration tab is displayed. If it is displayed, click [Yes] and  
search for the equipment using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box.  
After searching the equipment, the SNMP communication will be enabled. For the  
instructions on how to search the equipment, refer to the instructions of TopAccess-  
DocMon.  
P.335 "Searching for a Printer"  
248  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
       
— About Tab  
The About Tab contains information about the printer driver’s version. The following figure is  
the About Tab for e-STUDIO4511 Series.  
Printing with Extended Print Functionality  
In this section, procedures are given to print various types of print job, using the layout and fin-  
ishing options. This section can help you to find a print method that you desired.  
Printing Various Print Job Types  
The printer drivers provide various ways to handle such jobs as Scheduled Print, Private Print,  
Proof Print, Overlay Image file, and Store to e-Filing.  
— Printing Scheduled Print Jobs  
The Print Scheduling feature allows you to specify the date and time to print your job. This can  
be especially useful for delaying printing until off-peak hours.  
Printing on a specified data and time  
1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Scheduled Print”.  
2. Click [Edit...].  
•
The Scheduled Time dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
249  
           
3. Click the arrow button at the “Date” drop down box to display  
the Calendar window, and select the date that you want to  
print.  
4. Select the time field and click the spin button to change the  
time.  
•
•
To change the hour, select the hour number and click the spin button.  
To change the time, select the time number and click the spin button.  
5. Click [OK].  
•
The specified date and time is displayed in the Time field.  
6. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
7. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The document will be queued to print at the specified time and date.  
— Printing Private Print Jobs  
The private print feature permits sensitive or confidential documents to be printed only in the  
presence of the person who sent the job.  
Printing confidential documents  
1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Private Print” and enter  
a five-digit document identification number in the “Document  
ID number” field.  
250  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
   
NOTE:  
•
This number will be used to release the private job from the Touch Panel Display. If  
you forget this number, you can no longer print the private print job.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is stored in the Private Job list in the Touch Panel Dis-  
play.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can release the private job from the Private Job list in the Touch Panel Display.  
Please refer to the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for this instruction.  
— Printing Proof Print Jobs  
The proof print feature prevents costly mistakes by allowing you to check the printed output on  
a sample copy before printing an entire multi-copy job  
Printing a proof copy  
1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Proof Print”.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
One copy of the document is printed and the print job is stored in the  
Proof Job list in the Touch Panel Display.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can release the remaining copies of a proof job from the Proof Job list in the  
Touch Panel Display. Please refer to the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function  
for this instruction.  
— Creating An Overlay File  
You can print a document as an overlay file. The created overlay file can then be merged into  
another document during printing.  
P.267 "Printing with an Overlay File"  
NOTES:  
•
•
If the print job has several pages in the document, only the first page of the docu-  
ment will be saved as an overlay file.  
Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay  
image must be created at the same size, orientation, color mode, and resolution.  
Printing a document as an overlay file  
1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Print to Overlay File”.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
251  
       
•
The Create Page Overlay dialog box appears.  
3. Browse the folder where you want to save an overlay file,  
enter a file name, and then click [OK].  
•
The file name must be up to eight characters long (not including the  
extension).  
4. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The document is saved as an overly file.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can use created overly file to print a document.  
P.267 "Printing with an Overlay File"  
— Storing to e-Filing  
The Store to e-Filing feature allows you to send print jobs to e-Filing on this equipment. The job  
stored to e-Filing can then be print from the Touch Panel Display at a later time. It can be also  
composed with other documents using the e-Filing web utility.  
You can store a print job to either public box or user box. The public box is shared by all users  
who can see the jobs stored in this box. The user box is for personal use and is protected by  
password.  
NOTE:  
•
When you store a document in e-Filing using the printer driver, the printing image  
(not the original document in your computer) will be stored in e-Filing.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
•
You can manage the files within a box from the Touch Panel Display. Please refer to  
the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function to manage files in a box.  
You can also manage the files within a box using the e-Filing web utility. Please  
refer to the e-Filing Guide.  
Saving a print job to a public box  
1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Store to e-Filing”. Then  
select “Public Box” to save a print job to a public box.  
2. If you print a job as well as saving to the public box, check  
the “Print” box.  
252  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
   
3. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
4. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is saved to a public box.  
Saving a print job to a user box  
1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Store to e-Filing”. Then  
select user box number to be save.  
2. Enter the password for the user box in the “Password” field.  
3. If you print a job as well as saving to a box, check the “Print”  
box.  
4. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
5. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is saved to a specified user box.  
Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options  
Printer drivers allows you to create a print job with layout options to make your document more  
essential. Also you can enable finishing options that determine how the jobs are output, such as  
stapling and hole punching, sorting, and creating a booklet.  
— Sort Printing  
You can select how multiple copies of a document to be output, such as separately for each copy,  
grouping each page, and alternating the paper direction for each copies.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
253  
     
Output each copy separately  
1. Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be  
printed at the “Number of Copies” field. Then select “Sort  
Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down box.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is output separately for each copy.  
Output with grouping of each page within a set  
For example, assume that you have a three page job (A, B, C) and you want three copies of each  
page in this order (AAA, BBB, CCC).  
1. Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be  
printed at the “Number of Copies” field. Then select “Group  
Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down box.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is output separately for each page.  
Output in a different direction for each copy  
NOTE:  
•
Rotated Sort Copies can be enabled only when printing on Letter, A4, or B5.  
1. Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be  
printed at the “Number of Copies” field. Then select “Rotated  
Sort Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down box.  
254  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
       
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is output in different direction for each copy.  
— Enlarge/Reduce Printing  
You can automatically enlarge or reduce a document image to fit a specified paper size, or man-  
ually set the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce the image.  
Printing enlarged or reduced image to fit specified paper size  
1. Display the Setup tab and select the document size on the  
“Original Paper Size” drop down box. Then select the paper  
size that you want to print at the “Print Paper Size” drop  
down box.  
•
The document image is automatically enlarged or reduced depending  
on the original paper size and print paper size.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
Enlarged or reduced image is printed to fit specified paper size.  
Printing an enlarged or reduced image by specifying the zoom  
ratio manually  
1. Display the Setup tab and check the “Manual Scale” box.  
Then enter the percentage of zoom ratio.  
•
The zoom ratio can be set from 25% to 400% in units of 1%.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
Enlarged or reduced image is printed by specified zoom ratio.  
— Printing Color Document in Gray scale  
This equipment can print in color as well as black and white.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
255  
         
The printer driver automatically detects whether the document uses only color or only black and  
white, and it prints the document accordingly.  
Additionally, you can select black and white mode manually to print a color document in gray  
scale to reduce the print cost and consumption of color toners.  
NOTE:  
•
This is only available for PCL5c printer driver and PS3 printer driver.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
This is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
Printing a color document in gray scale  
1. Display the Setup tab and select “Mono” at the “Color” drop  
down box.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is printed in gray scale.  
— Stapling and Hole Punching  
You can staple and punch the paper.  
NOTES:  
•
•
Stapling is not available if a finisher is not installed.  
Hole Punching is not available if a hole punch unit is not installed.  
Stapling the paper  
1. Display the Setup tab and select how to staple at the “Staple”  
drop down box.  
Upper Left — Select this to staple in the upper left and print.  
Center Top — Select this to staple double in the upper side and print.  
Upper Right — Select this to staple in the upper right and print.  
Middle Left — Select this to staple double in the left and print.  
Center Double — Select this to fold and staple double in the center and print.  
NOTES:  
•
The selectable options vary depending on the paper size.  
256  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
     
•
•
“Upper Left” and “Upper Right” can be selected only when the Single-staple Fin-  
isher, Multi-staple Finisher, or Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed and configured on  
the Configuration tab.  
“Center Top” and “Middle Left” can be selected only when the Multi-staple Finisher  
or Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The output is stapled for each copy.  
Punching holes  
1. Display the Setup tab and select how to punch holes at the  
“Hole Punch” drop down box.  
Center Top — Select this to create holes on the upper side.  
Middle Left — Select this to create holes on the left side.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The output is hole punched.  
— Printing on Both Sides of a Sheet  
You can print on both sides of the paper.  
Printing both sides of paper  
1. Display the Setup tab and select the direction to be printed at  
the “2-Sided Printing” drop down box.  
Book — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in a vertically direction, so  
the pages can be bound and turned over right and left.  
Tablet — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in a vertical reversal  
motion, so the pages can be bound and turned over up and down.  
2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is printed on both side of paper in the specified direction.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
257  
     
— Printing or Inserting Sheets from Different Paper Sources  
You can print paper for covers, back covers, or for insert between pages by feeding from differ-  
ent paper source. This is useful when you want to print or insert a color cover and color sheets in  
front of every chapter in a document.  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
A front cover can be also printed or inserted for booklet printing by setting it in the  
Booklet window.  
P.260 "Printing Booklets"  
A front cover and back cover can be also printed or inserted for N-up printing by set-  
ting it in the Multiple Pages per Sheet window.  
P.263 "Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet"  
Printing or inserting a front cover and back cover  
1. Display the Standard window of the Layout tab.  
2. To print or insert a front cover, check the “Use Front Cover”  
box and select the drawer where the cover paper is loaded at  
the “Source” drop down box. Then select whether inserting a  
blank cover or printed front cover at the “Print Style” drop  
down box.  
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank front cover.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page of the document on a  
front side of a cover.  
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages of the doc-  
ument on both sides of a cover.  
NOTE:  
•
“Print on both sides of page” is available only when 2-Sided printing is enabled at  
the Setup tab.  
3. To print or insert a back cover, check the “Use Back Cover”  
box and set the “Source” and “Print Style” options that you  
require.  
•
How to set the Source and Print Style options are the same as “Use  
Front Cover” option.  
258  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
     
4. To print or insert sheets between the pages, check the “Insert  
Pages” box and set the “Source” and “Print Style” options as  
you require. Then enter the page numbers the sheets will be  
inserted.  
•
•
•
•
How to set the Source and Print Style options are same as “Use Front  
Cover” option.  
If you want to enter more than one page in the “Pages” field, separate  
the page numbers with commas.  
When you select “Print on 1 side of page”, specified page will be  
printed on the inserted sheet.  
When you select “Print on both sides of page”, specified page and the  
next page will be printed on the both sides of the inserted sheet.  
5. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
6. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
A front cover and back cover are printed or inserted for output.  
— Interleaving Pages  
This feature is useful when you want to insert paper of a different type, or from another source,  
between every page of your print job. For example, you could use this option to insert blank,  
colored sheets between overhead transparencies.  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
Interleaving pages can also be enabled for N-up printing by setting it in the Multiple  
Pages per Sheet window.  
P.263 "Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet"  
Inserting sheets every page of a print job  
1. Display the Standard window of Layout tab.  
2. To insert sheets between every page, check the “Interleave  
Pages” box and select the drawer where the paper for a cover  
is loaded at the “Source” drop down box.  
3. To print the previous page on interleaved sheets, check on  
“Duplicate” box.  
•
This equipment prints every previous page on interleaved sheets  
which are inserted after the page so that you can duplicate a docu-  
ment.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
259  
     
4. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
5. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
Sheets are interleaved between every page.  
— Printing Booklets  
Printing in normal booklet mode produces a document that, when folded, becomes a properly  
paginated booklet or magazine-style publication. You can even create bound booklets that are  
folded and stapled in the center.  
For example, if you create a document on letter-size paper (8½ x 11 inches) and then print in  
booklet mode, the yield is a 5½-x-8½-inch booklet. Each page has been scaled to fit on half a  
sheet and reordered so that the booklet is properly paginated when folded.  
To retain your original document size when printing booklets, select the booklet size same as  
your original document size. Then, your 8½-inch document is printed on ledger size paper (11 x  
17 inches) and reordered so that, when folded, the yield is an 8½-x-11-inch booklet. You can  
select from the following page-size options when printing a tiled booklet:  
•
•
•
Letter Booklet on Ledger  
A4 Booklet on A3  
B4 Booklet on B5  
Creating a booklet  
1. Display the Booklet window of Layout tab.  
260  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
2. Select the a booklet size at the “Output Document Layout”  
drop down box.  
A5 on A4 — Select this to print a A5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on  
A4 paper to fit on half a sheet (A5).  
A4 on A3 — Select this to print a A4 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on  
A3 paper to fit on half a sheet (A4).  
B5 on B4 — Select this to print a B5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on  
B4 paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).  
Letter-Half on Letter — Select this to print a 1/2 Letter size booklet. Every 2  
pages are printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet.  
LT on LD — Select this to print a Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed  
on Ledger paper to fit on half a sheet (Letter).  
A6 on A5 — Select this to print a A6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on  
A5 paper to fit on half a sheet (A6).  
B6 on B5 — Select this to print a B6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on  
B5 paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).  
1/2 LG on LG — Select this to print a 1/2 Legal size booklet. Every 2 pages are  
printed on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 Comp on Comp — Select this to print a 1/2 Computer size booklet. Every 2  
pages are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 Folio on Folio — Select this to print a 1/2 Folio size booklet. Every 2 pages  
are printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 Statement on Statement — Select this to print a 1/2 Statement size booklet.  
Every 2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 13’LG on 13’LG — Select this to print a 1/2 13inchLG size booklet. Every 2  
pages are printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet.  
1/2 8.5’SQ on 8.5’SQ — Select this to print a 1/2 8.5inchSQ size booklet. Every  
2 pages are printed on 8.5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet.  
32K on 16K — Select this to print a 32K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed  
on 16K paper to fit on half a sheet.  
16K on 8K — Select this to print a 16K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed  
on 8K paper to fit on half a sheet.  
3. If you want to add a margin space between facing pages,  
enter a width in the “Center Margin” field.  
•
•
You can change the unit of the margin at the “Units” drop down box.  
The center margin can be set from 0.000 inch to 0.500 inches in units  
of 0.01 inch when the unit is inch, and from 0.000 mm to 12.700 mm  
in units of 0.10 mm when the unit is mm.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
261  
   
4. If you want to add a margin on the outside edge, enter a width  
in the “Outer Margin” field.  
•
•
You can change the unit of the margin at the “Units” drop down box.  
The center margin can be set from 0.000 inch to 1.00 inches in units  
of 0.01 inch when the unit is inch, and from 0.000 mm to 25.40 mm in  
units of 0.10 mm when the unit is mm.  
5. If you want to double staple the center, check the “Staple  
Down the Center” box.  
NOTE:  
•
“Staple Down the Center” is available only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is  
installed and configured on the Configuration tab.  
6. If you want to create a booklet that can be read from right to  
left, check the “Number Pages from Right to Left” box.  
7. If you want to print or insert a front cover, check the “Use  
Front Cover” box and then select, at the “Source” drop down  
box, the drawer where the front cover is loaded. Also, at the  
“Print Style” drop down box, select whether you are inserting  
a blank cover or printed front cover.  
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank front cover.  
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages and last  
two page of document on both sides of a cover.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
•
•
The last two page will not be printed or printed only one page if there are no  
remained pages or only a last page for the cover.  
8. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
9. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is printed as a booklet.  
If a Saddle-stitch Finisher is not installed, the output will not be folded. But you can  
create a booklet by folding along the center by yourself.  
262  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
       
— Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet  
The N-up feature allows you to condense and print several pages of a document on one sheet of  
paper. This feature is very useful for browsing a large number of pages for appearance or page  
order.  
For example, to check the navigation path of a number of web pages or review the narrative of a  
slide presentation, using N-up is not only convenient but conserves paper as well.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If you are using the Image Overlay feature in combination with N-up printing, the  
overlay prints once per sheet, rather than once per page.  
Printing multiple pages per sheet  
1. Display the Multiple Pages per Sheet window on the Layout  
tab.  
2. Select how many multiple pages you want to print on a single  
sheet at the “Number of pages per Sheet” drop down box.  
2 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged left  
to right (when the orientation is portrait) or from top to bottom (when the orienta-  
tion is landscape) on one sheet.  
2 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged right  
to left (when the orientation is portrait) or from bottom to top (when the orientation  
is landscape) on one sheet.  
4 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged hor-  
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
4 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged hor-  
izontally from the right and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
4 pages: Left to Right by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages  
arranged vertically from the top and printed left to right on one sheet.  
4 pages: Right to Left by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages  
arranged vertically from the top and printed right to left on one sheet.  
6 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged hor-  
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
8 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 8 pages arranged hor-  
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
9 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged hor-  
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
16 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged  
horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
263  
   
3. If you want to draw a line around each page, check the “Draw  
Border Around Pages” box.  
4. If you want to print or insert a front cover, check the “Use  
Front Cover” box and then select, at the “Source” drop down  
box, the drawer where the front cover is loaded. Also, at the  
“Print Style” drop down box, select whether you are inserting  
a blank cover or printed front cover.  
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank front cover.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page of document on the  
front side of the cover.  
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages of docu-  
ment on both sides of the cover.  
NOTE:  
•
“Print on both sides of page” is available only when 2-Sided printing is enabled at  
the Setup tab.  
5. If you want to print or insert a back cover, check the “Use  
Back Cover” box and then select, at the “Source” drop down  
box, the drawer where the back cover is loaded. Also, at the  
“Print Style” drop down box, select whether you are inserting  
a blank cover or printed back cover.  
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank back cover.  
Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page of document on the  
front side of the back cover.  
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the last pages of document on  
both sides of the back cover.  
NOTE:  
•
•
“Print on both sides of page” is available only when 2-Sided printing is enabled at  
the Setup tab.  
Only one page will be printed on the back cover when only one page is remained for  
the back cover page, even if “Print on both sides of page” is selected.  
264  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
     
6. If you want to insert sheets between every page, check the  
“Interleave Pages” box and select the drawer where the inter-  
leaved sheets are loaded at the “Source” drop down box.  
•
If you want to print every previous page on interleaved sheets that are  
inserted after the page, check on “Duplicate” box.  
7. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
8. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
Multiple pages are printed per sheet.  
— Using Watermarks  
Watermarks overprint your document with useful information, such as “Confidential,” “Draft,”  
or “Original.” You can choose from several predefined watermarks or you can create and save  
your own custom watermarks.  
Watermarks are text only. To add graphics or other document elements, use image overlays  
instead.  
Printing a watermark  
1. Display the Effect tab and select the watermark to be printed  
at the “Watermark” drop down box.  
NOTE:  
•
You can create a new watermark if the watermark that you prefer is not listed in the  
drop down box.  
2. If you want to print the watermark on only the first page,  
check on the “Print on first page only” box.  
3. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
4. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is printed with the watermark.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
265  
       
Creating or editing a watermark  
1. Click [Add] to create new watermark, or select a watermark  
that you want to edit and click [Edit] to edit a watermark.  
•
The Watermark dialog box appears.  
2. Enter the watermark text in the “Caption” field.  
•
You can enter up to 63 characters for the “Caption” field.  
3. Select a font for the watermark at the “Font Name” drop down  
box.  
4. Select a font style for the watermark at the “Style” drop down  
box.  
5. Select a color for the watermark at the “Color” drop down  
box.  
•
If your preferred color is not listed in the drop down box, click  
[Browse...] to display the color palette and add your color.  
NOTE:  
•
•
The “Color” drop down box is not available for the PCL6 printer driver.  
When “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down box on the Setup tab, the “Color”  
drop down box is not available.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Color” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
6. Enter the font size in the “Font Size” field.  
266  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
•
You can enter any integer between 6 to 300pt in units of 1pt.  
7. To rotate the watermark, enter the degrees in the “Angle”  
field.  
•
You can enter from -90 degrees to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree in  
the “Angle” field.  
•
You can also set the angle using the scroll bar.  
8. Select how the watermark text is printed from “Solid”, “Draw  
as Outline”, and “Transparency”.  
Solid — Select this to print solid type of watermark.  
Draw as Outline — Select this to print an outline type of watermark.  
Transparency — Select this for a transparent watermark. Set the transparent  
ratio from 0 to 100% in units of 1%. You can also set the transparent ratio using  
the scroll bar.  
9. Click [OK] to save the watermark settings.  
•
The watermark is added or edited.  
Deleting a watermark  
NOTE:  
•
You can delete the default watermarks. However, they cannot be restored by click-  
ing the [Restore Defaults] button.  
1. Select a watermark that you want to delete at the “Water-  
mark” drop down box.  
2. Click [Delete].  
— Printing with an Overlay File  
Using image overlays ensures that widely-used images are readily available and consistently  
reproduced. Image overlays are independent documents that are merged into other documents  
during printing and thereby increase the time required to print a job. To superimpose text on  
your document, it may be faster to use watermarks.  
To print with an overlay file, you should create an overlay file first.  
P.251 "Creating An Overlay File"  
NOTES:  
•
•
If you use Image Overlays in combination with the N-up feature, the image overlay  
is printed once per sheet, not once per page.  
Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay  
image must be created at the same size, orientation, color mode, and resolution.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
267  
   
Printing an overlay image on a print job  
1. Display the Effect tab and check the “Use Overlay Image”  
box.  
2. Click [Browse...]  
•
The Open dialog box appears.  
3. Select the overlay file to be used and click [Open].  
4. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
5. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is printed with the overlay image.  
268  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
 
— Printing on a Tab Paper  
This equipment supports tab printing, which can print in the tab extension of the tab paper.  
NOTES:  
•
•
This equipment can print only on the Letter sized or A4 sized tab paper.  
If mis-printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously, dirt may  
adhere to the reverse side of a paper. To avoid this, it is recommended to print a tab  
paper as a separated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning  
before printing next tab paper.  
•
When printing tab paper, the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray  
because the roller to deliver the tab extension does not exit. In that case, remove  
the tab paper before printing a next job.  
Printing a document on a tab paper  
1. Create a Letter sized or A4 sized document and place the text  
or object that should appear on the tab extension as  
described below.  
When you create a document for tab printing, place the text or object that should  
appear on the tab extension on the right side of the document. You must place  
the text in the height exactly to fit to the tab extension. Also the right margin, a  
margin between the text and right edge of the document, must have more than  
0.08 inch or 2 mm space because the equipment cannot print in the space.  
Width of Tab Extension = Image Shift Margin  
More than 0.08" or 2mm  
Document  
Printed Image  
Must exactly  
fit the tab extension  
2. Place tab paper on the bypass guide so that the tab side  
becomes outside.  
Place the tab paper  
so that the tab side  
becomes outside.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
269  
 
3. When printing a document, display the [Setup] tab of the  
printer driver properties, select document size in the “Origi-  
nal Paper Size” drop down box, and select either “Letter Tab”  
or “A4 Tab” (according to the document size) in the “Print  
Paper Size” drop down box.  
•
The Primary Tab Dialog dialog box appears.  
4. In the “Tab Manufacturer” drop down box, select the product  
name of the tab paper that you use, or select “Custom” when  
you use other manufactured tab paper.  
5. When you select “Custom” in the “Tab Manufacturer” option,  
enter the width of tab extension in the “Tab Extension” field.  
6. Enter the width to shift the printed image in the “Image Shift  
Margin” filed.  
•
If you create a document as described in Step 1, enter the width of the  
tab extension here.  
NOTE:  
•
This equipment cannot print in the 0.08 inch or 2 mm margin area on the right side  
on the paper. Therefore, be sure to enter the image shift margin so that an image  
will be printed within the printable area.  
7. Click [OK].  
8. Set other print options you require and click [OK].  
9. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.  
•
The print job is printed on the tab paper.  
270  
Printing Guide — Printing from Windows  
Printing from Macintosh  
This equipment supports printing from Macintosh applications.  
Printing from an Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x  
Once you have installed the PPD file as described in the section “Installing the Printer on Mac  
OS 8.6/9.x” on page 169, you can print directly from most Mac OS applications.  
How to Print from Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x  
Before you can print to this equipment from applications, you must select it in the Chooser.  
Then, using the LaserWriter 8 printer driver and the correct PostScript Printer Description file  
(PPD), you can control the system’s various printing features by specifying job settings from  
print dialog boxes.  
— Selecting the Printer in the Chooser  
Before printing from applications, you must select the equipment in the Chooser.  
Setting the LaserWriter 8 printer in the Chooser  
1. Click Apple menu and select [Chooser].  
•
The Chooser window appears.  
2. Select the LaserWriter 8 icon and select the equipment in the  
“Select a PostScript Printer” list.  
3. Close the Chooser window.  
•
The LaserWriter 8 printer driver remains selected as the current  
printer until you choose a new printer.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
271  
           
— Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers  
In Mac OS applications, print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and the Print  
dialog box.  
Printing from Macintosh applications  
1. Open a file and select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of  
the application.  
2. Select the name of the equipment at the “Format for” drop  
down box and specify the Page Setup settings for your print  
job.  
•
Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a  
document.  
P.273 "Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"  
3. Click [OK] to save the Page Setup settings.  
4. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.  
5. In the dialog box that appears, make sure the name of the  
equipment is selected at the “Printer” menu and specify the  
Print settings for your print job.  
•
Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a  
document.  
P.274 "Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"  
6. Click [Print] to print a document.  
272  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
 
Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x  
The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Page Setup] command from the  
[File] menu of the application.  
In the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can specify the Page Attribute settings.  
NOTES:  
•
•
The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications.  
The PostScript Options window contains the setting items that are generally pro-  
vided by the LaserWriter 8 printer driver. For details of the PostScript Options,  
please refer to the Balloon Help on the Mac OS.  
— Page Attributes  
In the Page Attributes menu, you can specify the paper size, orientation, and scale.  
1
2
3
4
1) Format for  
This select the printer to be used for printing.  
2) Paper  
This selects the size of a document to be printed.  
Available original paper sizes are listed below:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Letter  
Ledger  
Legal  
Statement  
Computer  
Ledger-Wide  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A4  
A3  
A3-Wide  
A5  
A6  
•
•
•
•
•
Folio  
13inch LG  
8.5inch SQ  
8K  
16K  
B4  
B5  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
“Ledger-Wide” and “A3-Wide” are not available when the Single-staple Finisher is  
installed.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
“A3-Wide” and “Ledger-Wide” are not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
3) Orientation  
This sets the paper printing direction.  
•
Portrait — The document is printed in the portrait direction.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
273  
         
•
Landscape — The document is printed in the landscape direction.  
4) Scale  
This changes the size of the printed image on the page. Enter the zoom ratio to enlarge or  
reduce an image. You can set any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom ratio.  
Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x  
The Print dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Print] command from the [File] menu  
of the application.  
In the Print dialog boxes, you can display the General window, Background Printing window,  
Color Matching window, Cover Page window, Font Settings window, Job Logging window,  
Layout window, Finishing Save as File window, Options window, Printing Modes window,  
Booklet Mode Options window, Watermark Printing Options window, and Quality window.  
NOTES:  
•
•
The Print dialog boxes vary across applications.  
The Save as File window contains the setting items that are generally provided by  
the LaserWriter 8 printer driver. For details of the Save as File window, please refer  
to the Balloon Help on the Mac OS.  
— General  
In the General menu, you can set the general print options such as number of copies, sort print-  
ing.  
1
3
2
4
1) Copies  
This sets the number of printed copies. You can set any integer from 1 to 9999.  
2) Collated  
Check this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...)  
3) Pages  
This sets the pages to be printed.  
•
•
All — Select this to print all pages.  
From/To — Select this to specify the pages to be printed. Enter the page range in the  
From and To field.  
4) Paper Source  
This selects the source for feeding paper. Please select a paper source that correlates with the  
printing size.  
•
All pages from — Select this to use the same paper source for all pages. Select the paper  
source or paper type at the pop-up menu on the right.  
274  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
           
•
•
First page from — Select this to use the different paper source for the first page from  
the remaining pages. Select the paper source or paper type for the first page at the  
pop-up menu on the right.  
Remaining from — Select the paper source or paper type for the remaining pages at the  
pop-up menu on the right when you select the First page from option.  
— Background Printing  
In the Background Printing menu, you can set how the print job is spooled.  
1
2
1) Print in  
This sets how the print job is spooled.  
•
Foreground (no spool file) — Select this to disable any operation on the computer until  
printing is completed.  
•
Background — Select this to enable any operation on the computer during printing.  
2) Print Time  
This sets the schedule for printing.  
•
•
•
Urgent — Select this to print a job immediately.  
Normal — Select this to print a job normally.  
Print at — Select this to specify the time that the print job is sent to this equipment.  
Specify the time and date when this is selected.  
•
Put Document on Hold — Select this to hold the print job in the desktop print queue.  
To send the print job held in the desktop print queue, double-click the printer icon on the  
desktop and activate the print job.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
275  
       
— Color Matching  
This sets the color matching for printing.  
1
2
3
1) Print Color  
Select “Color/Grayscale” to print to this equipment. Other selections are not supported by  
this equipment.  
2) Intent  
Do not specify this because “ColorSync Color Matching” and “PostScript Color Matching”  
at the “Print Color” drop down box are not supported.  
3) Printer Profile  
Do not specify this because “ColorSync Color Matching” and “PostScript Color Matching”  
at the “Print Color” drop down box are not supported.  
— Cover Page  
In the Cover Page menu, you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page. The banner  
page includes information about owner of the job, job name, application name, date and time,  
printer name, and number of copies.  
1
2
1) Print Cover Page  
This sets how a banner page is inserted.  
•
•
None — Select this not to print a banner page.  
Before Document — Select this to print a banner page before the document. When this  
is selected, select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source option.  
276  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
               
•
After Document — Select this to print a banner page after the document. When this is  
selected, select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source option.  
2) Cover Page Paper Source  
Select the paper source when you set to print a banner page.  
— Font Settings  
In the Font Settings menu, you can set how the fonts are printed.  
1
2
3
4
1) Annotate Font Keys  
Check this to annotate font keys for printing.  
2) Preferred Format  
This sets the whether Type 1 fonts or TrueType fonts are used for printing.  
•
•
Type 1 — Select this to print fonts using Type 1 fonts.  
TrueType — Select this to print fonts using TrueType fonts.  
3) Always Download needed fonts  
Check this to always download fonts for printing.  
4) Never generate Type 42 format  
Check this not to generate the Type 42 format.  
— Job Logging  
In the Job Logging menu, you can set the error handling and generate job logs.  
1
2
3
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
277  
                 
1) If there is PostScript error  
This sets whether reporting the error or not.  
•
•
No special reporting — Select this not to report an error.  
Summarize on screen — Select this to report on the screen when a PostScript error  
occurs.  
•
Print detailed report — Select this to print a detailed report when a PostScript error  
occurs.  
2) Job Documentation  
This sets whether job logs or job copies are generated or not.  
•
Generate Job Copy — Check this to generate a job coy. If enabled, a job coy is gener-  
ated in the folder which is specified at the “Job Documentation Folder”.  
•
Generate Job Log — Check this to generate a job log. If enabled, a job coy is gener-  
ated in the folder which is specified at the “Job Documentation Folder”.  
3) Job Documentation Folder  
The folder where job copies and job logs are stored is displayed. To change the folder, click  
[Change] and select a different folder.  
— Layout  
In the Layout menu, you can set N-up printing and 2-Sided printing.  
1
2
3
4
5
1) Page per sheet  
This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit the  
selected paper size automatically.  
•
•
•
1 — Select this if do not wish to enable N-up printing.  
2 — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet.  
4 — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to  
bottom on one sheet.  
•
•
•
•
•
6 — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to  
bottom on one sheet.  
9 — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to  
bottom on one sheet.  
16 — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to  
bottom on one sheet.  
4 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged vertically  
from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.  
6 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged vertically  
from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.  
278  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
           
•
•
9 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged vertically  
from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.  
16 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged verti-  
cally from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.  
2) Layout direction  
This sets pages to be printed from left to right or right to left. It is available only when the  
N-up printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.  
3) Border  
Select whether a border line is to be drawn on each page. It is available only when the N-up  
printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.  
•
•
•
•
•
None — Select this if no border line to be drawn.  
Single hairline — Select this to draw a single hairline for the border.  
Single thin line — Select this to draw a single thin line for the border.  
Double hairline — Select this to draw a double hairline for the border.  
Double thin line — Select this to draw a double thin line for the border.  
4) Print on Both Sides  
Check this to print on both sides of the paper. When checked, select the binding direction at  
the “Binding” option.  
NOTE:  
•
2-sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed.  
5) Binding  
This sets the type of binding for 2-sided-printed pages.  
•
Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper. The direc-  
tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
•
Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper. The direc-  
tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
279  
       
— Finishing Options  
In the Finishing Options menu, you can set the destination, hole punching and stapling features.  
1
2
3
1) Destination  
This selects the output destination tray.  
•
•
Inner Tray — Select this to route the output to the inner tray.  
Job Separator Upper — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Job Sep-  
arator. (e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series Only)  
•
Job Separator Lower — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Job Sep-  
arator. (e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series Only)  
•
•
Tray 1 — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher.  
Tray 2 — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher.  
NOTE:  
•
•
“Tray 1” and “Tray 2” are only available when the Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple  
Finisher, or Saddle-stitch Finisher are installed.  
When the optional Job Separator is installed and configured on the Configuration  
tab, you can select “Job Separator Upper” and “Job Separator Lower” instead of  
“Inner Tray”.  
2) Hole Punch  
This sets whether or not a print job is hole punched.  
•
•
Off — Select this to print without hole punches.  
Long Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the left side for the  
portrait document, or on the top for the landscape document.  
280  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
       
•
•
•
Short Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the top for the por-  
trait document, or on the right for the landscape document.  
Long Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on the right  
side for the portrait document, or on the bottom for the landscape document.  
Short Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on the bot-  
tom for the portrait document, or on the left for the landscape document.  
NOTE:  
•
This option cannot be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed.  
3) Stapling  
This sets whether a print job is stapled.  
•
•
Off — Select this to print without stapling.  
Upper Left (Portrait)/Upper Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the upper  
left for the portrait document, or in the upper right for the landscape document.  
•
Middle Left (Portrait)/Middle Top (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in the  
left for the portrait document, or in the top for the landscape document.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
281  
 
•
•
•
•
•
Lower Left (Portrait)/Upper Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the lower left  
for the portrait document, or in the upper left for the landscape document.  
Upper Right (Portrait)/Lower Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the upper  
right for the portrait document, or in the lower right for the landscape document.  
Middle Right (Portrait)/Middle Bottom (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in  
the right for the portrait document, or in the bottom for the landscape document.  
Lower Right (Portrait)/Lower Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the lower  
right for the portrait document, or in the lower left for the landscape document.  
Middle Top (Portrait)/Middle Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in the  
top for the portrait document, or in the right for the landscape document.  
282  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
•
Middle Bottom (Portrait)/Middle Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in  
the bottom for the portrait document, or in the left for the landscape document.  
•
Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in  
the center for a booklet to be printed. Select this only when booklet printing is per-  
formed.  
NOTES:  
•
•
This option cannot be selected if a finisher is not installed.  
Only “Upper Left (Portrait)” can be selected when the Single-staple Finisher is  
installed.  
•
•
Double stapling is available only when the Multi-staple Finisher or Saddle-stitch Fin-  
isher is installed.  
“Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape)” is displayed when you select  
“Multi-position Stapler” or “Multi-position Stapler and Hole Punch” is selected in the  
Installable Options settings during the installation. However, this option is available  
only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
— Printing Modes  
In the Printing Mode menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job. This menu  
allows you to enable various system features such as Private Print and Proof Print.  
1
2
3
4
1) Print Mode  
This sets the type of print job.  
•
Normal — Select this to print a job normally.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
283  
     
•
•
Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multi-copy job then await your approval  
before printing the remaining copies. The print job sent as a proof job is saved in the  
proof job list on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until you acti-  
vate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment. This option allows you to  
check the output before printing additional copies and thereby reduce paper waste.  
Private - Document ID (DIN) — Select this to print a private job. When this is  
selected, enter 5-digit document ID in the field. The print job is saved in the private job  
queue on this equipment, and not printed until you activate printing from the Touch  
Panel Display of this equipment. This option is useful when you want to print a confi-  
dential document secured using a password. The user has to enter the password to print  
the private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel Display. It is recom-  
mended to specify the DIN when you select to print a private job. If you do not specify  
the DIN, the private job uses default DIN “00000”.  
2) Department Code  
Enter a user’s department code when this equipment is managed with department codes.  
Please ask your administrator for your department code.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which  
no department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on  
the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis-  
trator mode. When the Department Code Enforcement is enabled, the invalid  
department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list  
without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled, the invalid  
department code print job will be printed.  
3) Distinguish Thin Lines  
Select whether you require thin line printing.  
4) Do not Print Blank Pages  
Select whether you require printing blank pages.  
— Booklet Mode Options  
In the Booklet Mode Options menu, you can set booklet printing.  
NOTE:  
•
Booklet printing is available only when the ADU is installed.  
1
2
3
4
1) Booklet Page Size  
Select a paper size to print a booklet. Each two pages are printed on both side of a sheet  
before folding. The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size you specify here.  
284  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
           
NOTE:  
•
When booklet is used with cover page, it is recommended to use AppleTalk printing  
rather than LPR printing.  
2) Booklet Page Layout  
Select the direction to be printed.  
•
•
Right to Left — Select this to create a booklet can be read from right to left.  
Left to Right — Select this to create a booklet can be read from left to right.  
3) Booklet Center Margin  
Select the width of space added to the center. If there is not a preferred width in the list,  
enter the width by points. You can enter from 0 point to 300 points in units of 1 point.  
4) Booklet Outer Margin  
Select the width of space added in the short-edge side on a sheet. If there is not a preferred  
width in the list, enter the width by points. You can enter from 0 point to 18 points in units  
of 1 point.  
— Watermark Options  
In the Watermark Options (A) and Watermark Options (B) menu, you can enable watermark  
printing.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1) Watermarking  
This sets the printing of a watermark.  
2) Watermark Text  
Select the watermark text to be printed. If there is not a preferred watermark in the list,  
enter the watermark text in the field displayed.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
285  
           
3) Watermark Text Size  
Select the font size of watermark text. If there is not a preferred font size in the list, enter the  
font size by points. You can enter from 4 points to 400 points in units of 1 point.  
4) Watermark Text Angle  
Select the degree of angle for rotating the watermark text. If there is not a preferred angle in  
the list, enter the degrees from -90 to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree.  
5) Watermark Gray Level  
Select the gray level of the watermark text color. If there is not preferred gray level in the  
list, enter the percentage from 1% to 100% in units of 1%.  
6) Watermark Font  
Select the font family for the watermark text.  
7) Watermark Position  
Select the position of the watermark text. If there is not preferred position in the list, enter  
the X position and Y position manually.  
8) Watermark Outline  
Select the outline points or “Filled” to print a watermark as a solid text. If there is not a pre-  
ferred point listed, enter from 0.1 points to 20 points in units of 0.1 points.  
— Quality  
In the Quality menu, you can specify various image quality features.  
„
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
1
2
3
5
6
„
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
4
5
6
286  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
   
1) Color Resolution Type  
Select the combinations of color, resolution, and type.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mono Low-res Detail — Select this to print in black and white with low resolution and  
detailed image quality type.  
Mono Low-res Smooth — Select this to print in black and white with low resolution  
and smoothing image quality type.  
Color Low-res General — Select this to print in color with low resolution and general  
image quality type.  
Color Low-res Photo — Select this to print in color with low resolution and photo  
image quality type.  
Color Low-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with low resolution and pre-  
sentation image quality type.  
Color Low-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with low resolution and line art  
image quality type.  
Color High-res General — Select this to print in color with high resolution and general  
image quality type.  
Color High-res Photo — Select this to print in color with high resolution and photo  
image quality type.  
Color High-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with high resolution and  
presentation image quality type.  
Color High-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with high resolution and line art  
image quality type.  
Color Low-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with low resolution on the  
transparency sheet.  
Color High-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with high resolution on  
the transparency sheet.  
NOTE:  
•
When the optional expansion memory is not installed, the job will not be printed if  
you select “Color High-res General”, “Color High-res Photo”, Color High-res Presen-  
tation”, “Color High-res LineArt”, or “Color High-res Transparency”.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The Color Resolution Type option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and  
e-STUDIO280 Series.  
2) Pure Black & Gray  
Select whether printing the document in gray scale.  
•
•
Off — Select this to print the document in color mode.  
Pure Black only — Select this to print the contents in black where the percentage of all  
colors (cyan, magenta, and yellow) is 100%.  
•
Pure Black and Pure Gray — Select this to print the contents in black where the per-  
centage of all color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is 100% (C=100% -> K=100%,  
M=100% -> K=100%, Y=100% -> K=100%), and print the contents in gray scale where  
the percentage of each color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is the same percentage  
(C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The Pure Black & Gray option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
287  
   
3) Black Over Print  
Select this when printing background content that has black text overlayed on it. If this is  
not enabled, the background of the black content will not print. When you print a document  
that has any of its content on background with black text overlayed, enable this option.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Black Over Print” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
4) Halftone  
This sets how halftone is printed.  
•
•
Detail — Select this to print halftone in detail.  
Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
The “Halftone” option is not available for e-STUDIO4511 Series.  
5) Smoothing  
Select whether printing the texts and graphics smoothly.  
6) Toner Save  
Select this to print in the toner save mode.  
Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later  
Once you have installed the PPD file as described in “Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4  
or later” on page 176, you can print directly from most Mac OS applications.  
How to Print from Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later  
In Mac OS X 10.2.4, all writers are managed within the Print Center utility and there is no need  
to switch the printer.  
Once you add a printer to the Printer List, all printers can be selected directly from Print Setup  
dialog box.  
— Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers  
In Mac OS applications, print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and the Print  
dialog box.  
Printing from Macintosh applications  
1. Open a file and select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of  
the application.  
288  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
             
2. Select the name of the equipment at the “Format for” drop  
down box and specify the Page Setup settings for your print  
job.  
•
Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a  
document.  
P.289 "Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or  
later"  
3. Click [OK] to save the Page Setup settings.  
4. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.  
5. In the dialog box that appears, make sure the name of the  
equipment is selected at the “Printer” menu and specify the  
Print settings for your print job.  
•
Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a  
document.  
P.291 "Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or later"  
6. Click [Print] to print a document.  
Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4  
or later  
The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Page Setup] command from the  
[File] menu of the application.  
In the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can specify the Page Attribute settings.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
289  
 
NOTE:  
•
The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications.  
— Page Attributes  
1
2
3
4
1) Format for  
This select the printer to be used for printing.  
2) Paper Size  
This selects the size of a document to be printed.  
Available original paper sizes are listed below:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Letter  
Ledger  
Legal  
Statement  
Computer  
Ledger-Wide  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A4  
A3  
A3-Wide  
A5  
A6  
•
•
•
•
•
Folio  
13inch LG  
8.5inch SQ  
8K  
16K  
B4  
B5  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
“Ledger wide” and “A3 wide” are not available when the Single-staple Finisher is  
installed.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
“A3-Wide” and “Ledger-Wide” are not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
3) Orientation  
This sets the paper printing direction.  
•
•
•
Portrait — The document is printed in the portrait direction.  
Landscape (90 degree) — The document is printed in the landscape direction from left.  
Landscape (270 degree) — The document is printed in the landscape direction from  
right.  
4) Scale  
This changes the size of the printed image on the page. Enter the zoom ratio to enlarge or  
reduce an image. You can set any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom ratio.  
290  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
         
Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 or  
later  
The Print dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Print] command from the [File] menu  
of the application.  
In the Print dialog boxes, you can specify the Copies & Pages settings, Layout settings, Duplex  
settings (only for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8), Output Options settings, Scheduler settings (only  
for Mac OS X 10.3 or later), Cover Page settings (only for Mac OS X 10.3 or later), Paper Han-  
dling settings (only for Mac OS X 10.3 or later), Paper Feed settings, Error Handling settings,  
and Printer Feature settings.  
NOTE:  
•
The Print dialog boxes vary across applications.  
— Copies & Pages  
In the Copies & Pages menu, you can set you can set the general print options such as number of  
copies, sort printing.  
1
3
2
1) Copies  
This sets the number of printed copies. You can set any integer from 1 to 9999.  
2) Collated  
Check this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...)  
3) Pages  
This sets the pages to be printed.  
•
•
All — Select this to print all pages.  
From — Select this to specify the pages to be printed. Enter the page range in the From  
and To field.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
291  
         
— Layout  
In the Layout menu, you can set N-up printing (multiple pages per sheets). The items in the  
Layout menu vary depending on the Mac OS version.  
„
For Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8  
1
2
3
„
For Mac OS X 10.3 or later  
1
2
3
4
1) Page per Sheet  
This sets the number of multiple pages printed on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit the  
selected paper size automatically and are printed.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 — Select this if do not wish to enable N-up printing.  
2 — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet.  
4 — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged on one sheet.  
6 — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged on one sheet.  
9 — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged on one sheet.  
16 — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged on one sheet.  
292  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
     
2) Layout Direction  
This sets how pages are arranged on one sheet. This is available only when the N-up print-  
ing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.  
•
•
•
•
Across Left to Right Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from left to right  
and then top to bottom on one sheet.  
Across Right to Left Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from right to left  
and then top to bottom on one sheet.  
Down Before Across Left to Right — Pages arranged vertically from top to down and  
then left to right on one sheet.  
Down Before Across Right to Left — Pages arranged vertically from top to down and  
then right to left on one sheet.  
3) Border  
Select if a border line is to be drawn on each page. This is available only when the N-up  
printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.  
•
•
•
•
•
None — Select this if no border line is to be drawn.  
Single hairline — Select this to draw single hairline for the border.  
Single thin line — Select this to draw single thin line for the border.  
Double hairline — Select this to draw double hairline for the border.  
Double thin line — Select this to draw double thin line for the border.  
4) Two Sided Printing  
This sets whether or not you want to print on both sides of the paper.  
•
•
Off — Select this when you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.  
Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper. The direc-  
tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
•
Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper. The direc-  
tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
NOTES:  
•
•
This option is not displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8. When you want to  
enable 2-Sided printing on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8, set the Duplex settings in the  
Duplex menu.  
P.294 "Duplex"  
2-sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
293  
     
— Duplex  
In the Duplex menu, you can set 2-Sided printing (printing on both sides of a sheet).  
NOTES:  
•
This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10.3 or later. When you want to enable  
2-Sided printing on Mac OS X 10.3 or later, set the Two Sided Printing option in the  
Layout menu.  
P.292 "Layout"  
•
2-sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed.  
2
1
1) Print on Both Sides  
Check this to print on both sides of the paper. When this is checked, select the binding direc-  
tion at the “Binding” option.  
2) Binding  
This sets the type of binding for 2-sided printed pages.  
•
Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper. The direc-  
tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
•
Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper. The direc-  
tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.  
Portrait  
1
Landscape  
1
294  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
       
— Output Options  
In the Output Options menu, you can save a print job as a file.  
1
2
1) Save as File  
Check this to save a print job as a file. When this is checked, select the file type at the “For-  
mat” drop down box.  
2) Format  
This sets the format of a file to be saved.  
•
•
PDF — Select this to save a print job as a PDF file.  
PostScript — Select this to save a print job as a PS file.  
— Scheduler  
In the Scheduler menu, you can set when a print job will be sent to the equipment.  
NOTE:  
•
This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8.  
1
2
1) Print Document  
This sets when a print job will be sent to the equipment.  
•
•
Now — Select this to send a print job now.  
At — Select this to specify the time to send a print job. When you select this, specify  
the time to be send. The print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS until the speci-  
fied time has been reached or you resume the print job to be sent from the queue on Mac  
OS.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
295  
             
•
On Hold — Select this to hold a print job in the queue on Mac OS. When you select  
this, the print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS until you resume the print job to  
be sent from the queue on Mac OS.  
2) Priority  
Select the priority of a print job.  
— Paper Handling  
In the Paper Handling menu, you can set Reverse page order printing and Odd or Even num-  
bered page printing.  
NOTE:  
•
This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8.  
1
2
1) Reverse page order  
Check this when you want to print a document from the end of page.  
2) Print  
Select whether all pages will be printed or only odd or even pages will be printed.  
296  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
       
— Cover Page  
In the Cover Page menu, you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page. The banner  
page includes information about owner of the job, job name, application name, date and time,  
printer name, and number of copies.  
NOTE:  
•
This menu is not displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8.  
1
2
3
1) Print Cover Page  
This sets how a banner page is inserted.  
•
•
•
None — Select this not to print a banner page.  
Before Document — Select this to print a banner page before the document.  
After Document — Select this to print a banner page after the document.  
2) Cover Page Type  
Select the type of a banner page.  
3) Billing Info  
Enter the billing information to have it appear on the banner page.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
297  
       
— Error Handling  
In the Error Handling menu, you can set how to report a PostScript error.  
1
2
1) PostScript Error  
This sets whether or not you want to print a PostScript error report.  
•
No special reporting — Select this if you do not want to print PostScript error informa-  
tion.  
•
Print detailed report — Select this to print PostScript error information.  
2) Tray Switching  
This is not supported by this equipment.  
— Paper Feed  
In the Paper Feed menu, you can set the paper source.  
1
2
3
1) All pages from  
Select the option button when you want to use same paper source for all pages. When this is  
selected, select the paper source or paper type to be used at the drop down menu.  
2) First page from  
Select the option button when you want to specify different paper source for a first page and  
remaining pages. When this selected, select the paper source or paper type to be used for a  
first page at the drop down menu.  
298  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
               
3) Remaining from  
Select the paper source or paper type to be used for remaining pages in the drop down menu.  
This can be selected only when you select the option button of the “First page from” option.  
— Printer Features  
In the Printer Features menu, you can set special printing features.  
Booklet  
In the Booklet menu, you can set booklet printing.  
1
2
3
4
1) Booklet Page Size  
Select a paper size for the booklet. Each two pages are printed on both side of a sheet which  
is then folded. The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size that you specify.  
2) Left to Right Page Layout  
Check this to create a booklet can be read from left to right.  
3) Booklet Center Margin  
Select the width of space added to the center.  
4) Booklet Outer Margin  
Select the width of space added short edge side of a sheet.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
299  
               
DC (Department Code)  
In the DC menu, you can specify your department code, if this equipment is enabled the depart-  
ment codes. Before specifying the department code, you must check the Department Code  
option in the Printing Modes menu. Then specify the department code in this menu.  
1
2
3
4
5
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which  
no department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on  
the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis-  
trator mode. When the Department Code Enforcement is enabled, the invalid  
department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list  
without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled, the invalid  
department code print job will be printed.  
1) Department Code (DC) - Digit 1  
Select the first digit of the department code.  
2) Department Code (DC) - Digit 2  
Select the second digit of the department code.  
3) Department Code (DC) - Digit 3  
Select the third digit of the department code.  
4) Department Code (DC) - Digit 4  
Select the forth digit of the department code.  
5) Department Code (DC) - Digit 1  
Select the fifth digit of the department code.  
300  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
   
DIN (Document ID Number)  
In the DIN menu, you can specify the Document ID number for the private job. It is recom-  
mended to specify the DIN when you select to print a private job. If you do not specify the DIN,  
the private job uses default DIN “00000”.  
1
2
3
4
5
1) Private Print Document ID (DIN) - Digit 1  
Select the first digit of the Document ID.  
2) Private Print Document ID (DIN) - Digit 2  
Select the second digit of the Document ID.  
3) Private Print Document ID (DIN) - Digit 3  
Select the third digit of the Document ID.  
4) Private Print Document ID (DIN) - Digit 4  
Select the forth digit of the Document ID.  
5) Private Print Document ID (DIN) - Digit 5  
Select the fifth digit of the Document ID.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
301  
   
Finishing  
In the Finishing menu, you can set destination, hole punching and stapling.  
1
2
3
1) Destination  
This selects the destination tray.  
•
•
Inner Tray — Select this to route the output to the inner tray.  
Job Separator Upper — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Job Sep-  
arator. (e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series Only)  
•
Job Separator Lower — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Job Sep-  
arator. (e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series Only)  
•
•
Tray 1 — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher.  
Tray 2 — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher.  
NOTE:  
•
•
“Tray 1” and “Tray 2” are only available when the Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple  
Finisher, or Saddle-stitch Finisher are installed.  
When the optional Job Separator is installed and configured on the Configuration  
tab, you can select “Job Separator Upper” and “Job Separator Lower” instead of  
“Inner Tray”.  
2) Hole Punch  
This sets whether a print job is hole punched.  
•
•
Off — Select this to print without hole punches.  
Long Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to punch holes on the left side for a  
portrait document, or on the top for a landscape document.  
302  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
     
•
•
•
Short Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to punch holes on the top for a por-  
trait document, or on the right for a landscape document.  
Long Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to punch holes on the right  
side for a portrait document, or on the bottom for a landscape document.  
Short Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to punch holes on the bot-  
tom for a portrait document, or on the left for a landscape document.  
NOTE:  
•
This option cannot be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed.  
3) Stapling  
This sets whether a print job is stapled.  
•
•
Off — Select this to print without staples.  
Upper Left (Portrait)/Upper Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the upper  
left for a portrait document, or in the upper right a the landscape document.  
•
Middle Left (Portrait)/Middle Top (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in the  
left for a portrait document, or in the top for a landscape document.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
303  
 
•
•
•
•
•
Lower Left (Portrait)/Upper Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the lower left  
for a portrait document, or in the upper left for a landscape document.  
Upper Right (Portrait)/Lower Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the upper  
right for a portrait document, or in the lower right for a landscape document.  
Middle Right (Portrait)/Middle Bottom (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in  
the right for a portrait document, or in the bottom for a landscape document.  
Lower Right (Portrait)/Lower Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the lower  
right for a portrait document, or in the lower left for a landscape document.  
Middle Top (Portrait)/Middle Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in the  
top for a portrait document, or in the right for a landscape document.  
304  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
•
Middle Bottom (Portrait)/Middle Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in  
the bottom for a portrait document, or in the left for a landscape document.  
•
Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in  
the center for a booklet but only when booklet printing is required.  
NOTES:  
•
•
Do not select this option if a finisher is not installed.  
Only “Upper Left (Portrait)” is available when the Single-staple Finisher is installed.  
Do not select other options when the Single-staple Finisher is installed.  
Double stapling is available only when the Multi-staple Finisher or Saddle-stitch Fin-  
isher is installed. Do not select the double stapling options when neither the  
Multi-staple Finisher nor Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.  
Saddle Stitching is available only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed. Do  
not select the saddle stitching options when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is not  
installed.  
•
•
Printing Modes  
In the Printing Modes menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job. This  
menu allows you to enable various job types such as Private Print and Proof Print.  
1
2
3
4
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
305  
 
1) Print Mode  
This sets the type of print job.  
•
•
Normal — Select this to print a normal job.  
Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval  
before printing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job, is saved in the  
proof job queue on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until you  
activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option allows you to check a job’s  
output before printing the remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste.  
Private Print using Document ID (DIN) — Select this to print a private job. When  
this is selected, specify the 5-digit Document ID (DIN) in the DIN menu. The print job  
is saved in the private job queue on this equipment, and not printed until you activate  
printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment. This option is useful when  
you want to print a confidential document secured using a password. The user has to  
enter the password to print the private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel  
Display.  
•
2) Department Code (DC) On  
Check this if a department code is required for printing. When this is enabled, specify the  
5-digit department code in the DC menu.  
Enabling the department code depends on whether this equipment is managed with depart-  
ment codes or not. Please ask your administrator for your department code.  
3) Distinguish Thin Lines  
Check this to print thin lines clearly.  
4) Do not Print Blank Pages  
Select whether you require printing blank pages.  
Quality  
In the Quality menu, you can specify various image quality features.  
„
For e-STUDIO4511 Series  
1
2
3
5
6
306  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
         
„
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series  
4
5
6
1) Color Resolution Type  
Select the combinations of color, resolution, and type.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mono Low-res Detail — Select this to print in black and white with low resolution and  
detailed image quality.  
Mono Low-res Smooth — Select this to print in black and white with low resolution  
and smoothing image quality.  
Color Low-res General — Select this to print in color with low resolution and general  
image quality.  
Color Low-res Photo — Select this to print in color with low resolution and photo  
image quality.  
Color Low-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with low resolution and pre-  
sentation image quality.  
Color Low-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with low resolution and line art  
image quality.  
Color High-res General — Select this to print in color with high resolution and general  
image quality.  
Color High-res Photo — Select this to print in color with high resolution and photo  
image quality.  
Color High-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with high resolution and  
presentation image quality.  
Color High-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with high resolution and line art  
image quality.  
Color Low-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with low resolution on the  
transparency sheet.  
Color High-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with high resolution on  
the transparency sheet.  
NOTE:  
•
When the optional expansion memory is not installed, the job will not be printed if  
you select “Color High-res General”, “Color High-res Photo”, Color High-res Presen-  
tation”, “Color High-res LineArt”, or “Color High-res Transparency”.  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
307  
 
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The Color Resolution Type option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and  
e-STUDIO280 Series.  
2) Pure Black & Gray  
Select whether printing the document in gray scale.  
•
•
Off — Select this to print the document in color mode.  
Pure Black only — Select this to print the contents in black where the percentage of all  
colors (cyan, magenta, and yellow) is 100%.  
•
Pure Black and Pure Gray — Select this to print the contents in black where the per-  
centage of all color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is 100% (C=100% -> K=100%,  
M=100% -> K=100%, Y=100% -> K=100%), and print the contents in gray scale where  
the percentage of each color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is the same percentage  
(C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The Pure Black & Gray option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
3) Black Over Print  
Select this when printing background content that has black text overlayed on it. If this is  
not enabled, the background of the black content will not print. When you print a document  
that has any of its content on background with black text overlayed, enable this option.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Black Over Print” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
4) Halftone  
This sets how halftone is printed.  
•
•
Detail — Select this to print halftone in detail.  
Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
The “Halftone” option is not available for e-STUDIO4511 Series.  
5) Smoothing  
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.  
6) Toner Save  
Check this to print in the toner save mode.  
308  
Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh  
         
Printing from UNIX  
Printing from an Application  
This section describes how to print from a UNIX workstation.  
NOTE:  
•
Before attempting to print from a UNIX workstation, make sure all the UNIX Filters  
are installed in your workstation.  
P.185 "Installing Client Software for UNIX"  
Considerations and Limitations  
„
This equipment acts only as a filter and not as a complete driver. The size and order of the  
printed pages cannot be modified.  
„
The UNIX filters do not support the following engine-supplied features:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Enlarge/Reduce printing  
Rotate Sort  
N-up printing  
Watermarks  
Cover Sheets  
Sheet Insertion  
Scheduled Print  
Print to Overlay File  
Store to e-Filing  
Use Overlay Image  
„
„
Linux uses the lptap command to send a file to this equipment.  
Since lp is not supported in all versions of Linux, the lptap command should be used instead.  
AIX supports printing using the qdaemon. This can be invoked by the user with the com-  
mands lp , lpr or qprt . In order to use the filter, either lp or qprt should be used.  
Printing using LP Command  
Use the lp command (lptap in Linux) to send a file to this equipment for printing. This com-  
mand specifies various printer-specific options using the -o option parameter on the command  
line. The lp command also sets other print options using various other parameters. Use the man  
net_est4511.1 command to display the online document that describes the various options and  
parameters that can be set to configure printed output.  
All the options are sent to this equipment at the start of a print job so, if the print file contains its  
own commands, they may override the lp options.  
Generic “lp” and “lptap” Options  
— Copies  
The number of copies of a print job is specified using the “-n value” parameter with the “lp”  
command. The copy count is displayed on the banner page. The default value is determined by  
the “lp” command and it is always 1. The copies are always collated.  
— Title  
The title that is printed on the banner page can be specified using the “-t title” parameter with the  
“lp” command. The default value is determined by the “lp” command and it is often the name of  
the print file. If multiple files are printed using the same “lp” command the default title is set to  
the name of the first file by the “lp” command.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
309  
                 
General Options  
The following options apply to all print files.  
— Print Language  
The “net_est4511” or “net_estbw” program needs to know what printer language is used in each  
of the files that it is printing so that it can issue the correct commands to select various options.  
The following options are valid for the print languages.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
auto  
Each file to be printed is examined to see if it starts with the  
“%!” sequence. If it does, then it is assumed that it is a Post-  
Script file, otherwise it assumes that it is a plain text or a PCL5c  
or PCL6 file.  
pcl  
The print file is always treated as a plain text or a PCL5c or  
PCL6 file.  
postscript  
raw  
ps  
The file is always treated as a PostScript file.  
The file is treated as a fully formatted file that already contains  
all the necessary commands. The file is sent to the printer with-  
out any modifications. In this mode no other options are valid  
and a banner page is not printed.  
All PCL5e jobs automatically send the “<esc>&k2G” command to convert the line-feed charac-  
ter into a carriage-return – line-feed sequence. If the PCL5e job contains some of its own escape  
sequences it may override this setting.  
The default print language is “auto”.  
Example: The command to specify that a file is PostScript is “lp –o ps filename”.  
— Color Mode  
The color mode can be specified using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
color  
Print the document in the color mode.  
grayscale  
Print the document in the grayscale mode.  
If this option is not specified, the default color mode will be used (color).  
Example: The command to specify color mode is “lp –o color filename”.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Color Mode” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series.  
— Stapling  
The staple position can be specified using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
staple=0  
staple=1  
Stapling is turned off.  
Staple in the top left corner of a portrait page and the upper right  
corner of a landscape page.  
310  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
             
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
staple=2  
Put two staples on the left side of a portrait page or the top side  
of a landscape page printed on long-edge-feed paper. This com-  
mand has no affect when the paper is fed from the short-edge  
side.  
staple=3  
staple=4  
staple=5  
Staple in the bottom left corner of a portrait page and the upper  
left corner of a landscape page.  
Staple in the top right corner of a portrait page and the bottom  
right corner of a landscape page.  
Put 2 staples on the right side of a portrait page or the bottom  
side of a landscape page printed on long-edge-feed paper. This  
command has no affect when the paper is fed from the  
short-edge side.  
staple=6  
staple=7  
Staple in the bottom right corner of a portrait page and the lower  
left corner of a landscape page.  
Put 2 staples on the top side of a portrait page or the right side of  
a landscape page printed on short-edge-feed large format (A3/  
Ledger) paper. This command has no affect when the paper is  
fed from the long-edge side or small paper size.  
staple=8  
staple=9  
Put 2 staples on the bottom side of a portrait page or the left side  
of a landscape page printed on short-edge-feed large format  
(A3/Ledger) paper. This command has no affect when the paper  
is fed from the long-edge side or small paper size.  
Put 2 staples in the middle of a landscape page and fold the  
paper in half vertically along the staple line (saddle stitching).  
This command works in conjunction with booklet printing. This  
command has no affect when the paper is fed from the  
long-edge side.  
If this option is not specified, the printer’s default value will be used.  
Example: The command to staple in the upper left corner of a long edge feed portrait page is  
“lp –o staple=1 filename”.  
The value for the stapling position depends on the paper size, the paper feed direction, and the  
print direction. This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users should refer to the  
copier manual for a list of compatible paper sizes. In particular, A5, A6 and statement paper  
sizes will not work with this function.  
— Output Bin  
The output bin can be specified using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
inner  
bin1  
bin2  
jsp1  
jsp2  
Select the inner output tray.  
Select the upper output tray of the finisher.  
Select the lower output tray of the finisher.  
Select the upper output tray of the Job Separator.  
Select the lower output tray of the Job Separator.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
311  
   
If the finisher option is not installed on the equipment, the default output tray will be used  
(inner). If the finisher option is not installed on the equipment, the default output tray will be  
used (bin 2).  
Example: The command to specify output bin 1 is “lp –o bin1 filename”.  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series:  
“jsp1” and “jsp2” are not available for e-STUDIO4511 Series.  
— Hole Punching  
When the hole punch option is installed it can be activated using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
punch=0  
punch=1  
punch=2  
punch=3  
punch=4  
nopunch  
Hole punching is turned off.  
Hole punch long edge without rotation.  
Hole punch short edge without rotation.  
Hole punch long edge with 180 degree rotation.  
Hole punch short edge with 180 degree rotation.  
If this option is not specified, the default value of “nopunch” will be used.  
This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users should refer to the copier manual  
for a list of compatible paper sizes. In particular, A5, A6 and statement paper sizes will not  
work with this function.  
Example: The command to hole punch the long edge feed portrait page is  
“lp –o punch=1 filename”.  
— Media Type  
The paper source can also be selected using the media type using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
mtype=Plain  
The paper source that contains Plain paper is requested.  
mtype=Trans-  
parency  
The paper source that contains transparency slides is requested.  
mtype=Thick  
1
The paper source that contains Thick1 paper is requested.  
The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is requested.  
The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is requested.  
mtype=Thick  
2
mtype=Thick  
3
In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always turned on so the paper size has priority over  
the media type and the paper source.  
In PCL5e the paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source.  
If this option is not specified, the default value will be used.  
Example: The command to specify Thick1 media type is  
“lp –o mtype=Thick1 filename”.  
312  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
       
— Paper Source  
The paper source can be selected using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
auto-source  
manual  
upper  
Select auto paper tray selection.  
Select stack feed bypass.  
cas1  
cas2  
LCF  
cas3  
cas4  
Select the upper drawer.  
lower  
Select the lower drawer.  
lcf  
Select the large capacity feeder.  
Select the upper pedestal drawer.  
Select the lower pedestal drawer.  
pedupper  
pedlower  
In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always turned on so the paper size has priority over  
the paper source. In PCL5e the paper size always has priority over the paper source.  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used.  
Example: The command to specify the LCF paper source is “lp – o lcf filename”.  
— Duplexing  
The current duplex mode can be specified using the following options.  
NOTE:  
•
2-sided printing is available only when the ADU is installed.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
simplex  
duplex  
Turn duplexing off.  
Turn duplexing on with long edge binding.  
lduplex  
duplex_long  
duplex=long  
hduplex  
sduplex  
duplex_short Turn duplexing on with short edge binding.  
duplex=short  
vduplex  
If this option is not specified, the default value “simplex” will be used.  
It is not necessary to specify duplexing for Booklet Mode (sduplex). Setting duplexing sepa-  
rately can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing.  
Example: The command to specify long edge duplexing is “lp –o duplex filename”.  
— Paper Sizes  
The current paper size can be specified using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
letter  
lt  
Select letter size paper.  
LT  
a4  
A4  
Select A4 size paper.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
313  
       
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
legal  
lg  
Select legal size paper.  
LG  
statement  
ledger  
st  
Select statement size paper.  
Select ledger size paper.  
Select ledger-wide size paper.  
ST  
ld  
LD  
ledgerwide  
ldwide  
LDWIDE  
folio-japan  
a3  
folio  
A3  
Select folio size paper.  
Select A3 size paper.  
Select A3-wide size paper.  
Select A5 size paper.  
Select A6 size paper.  
Select JIS B4 size paper.  
A3WIDE  
A5  
a3wide  
a5  
A6  
a6  
B4  
b4  
b4-jis  
B4-JIS  
b5  
B5  
Select JIS B5 size paper.  
b5-jis  
B5-JIS  
co  
computer  
legal13  
Select computer size paper.  
Select LG13inch size paper.  
CO  
lg13  
LG13  
sq85  
8K  
letter-square Select SQ8.5inch size paper.  
8k  
Select 8K size paper.  
Select 16K size paper.  
16K  
16k  
If this option is not specified, the printer’s default value will be used.  
Example: The command to specify the A4 paper size is “lp –o a4 filename”.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
“ledgerwide” and “A3WIDE” are not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
— Printing Modes  
The printing mode can be selected using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
normal  
proof  
Process as a normal print job.  
Process as a proof print job.  
314  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
   
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
private=din  
Process as a private print job. The din is 5-digit Document ID  
number.  
If this option is not specified, the printer’s default value will be used.  
— Department Code  
The department access code can be set using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
dept=code  
Set the department access code. The code is a 5-digit numeric  
value.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which  
no department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on  
the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis-  
trator mode. When the Department Code Enforcement is enabled, the invalid  
department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list  
without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement is disabled, the invalid  
department code print job will be printed.  
— Smoothing  
The smoothing mode can be set using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
smoothing=  
on  
ON  
Set the smoothing mode.  
smoothing=  
off  
OFF  
Cancel the smoothing mode.  
Example: The command to set the smoothing mode is “lp –o smoothing=on filename”.  
— Distinguish Thin Lines  
The thin line limit mode can be set using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
thinlinelimit= ON  
on  
Set the thin line limit mode.  
thinlinelimit= OFF  
off  
Cancel the thin line limit mode.  
Example: The command to set the thin line limit mode is “lp –o thinlinelimit=on filename”.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
315  
           
— Do not Print Blank Pages  
The Blank page mode can be selected using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
blankpage=0  
blankpage=1  
Set the blank page mode (disable Do not Print Blank Pages).  
Cancel the blank page mode (enable Do not Print Blank Pages).  
— Toner Save  
The toner save mode can be set using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
tonersave=on ON  
tonersave=off OFF  
Set the toner save mode.  
Cancel the toner save mode.  
Example: The command to set the toner save mode is “lp –o tonersave=on filename”.  
— Booklet Modes  
The booklet mode can be selected using the following options.  
NOTE:  
•
Booklet printing is available only when the ADU is installed.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
booklet=  
letter  
lt  
Select letter size paper for booklet printing mode.  
LT  
a4  
booklet=  
A4  
Select A4 size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select legal size paper for booklet printing mode.  
booklet=  
legal  
lg  
LG  
booklet=  
statement  
st  
Select statement size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select ledger size paper for booklet printing mode.  
ST  
booklet=  
ledger  
ld  
LD  
booklet=  
folio  
folio-japan  
Select folio size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select A3 size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select A5 size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select JIS B4 size paper for booklet printing mode.  
booklet=  
A3  
a3  
a5  
booklet=  
A5  
booklet=  
B4  
b4  
B4-JIS  
b4-jis  
b5  
booklet=  
B5  
Select JIS B5 size paper for booklet printing mode.  
B5-JIS  
b5-jis  
316  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
           
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
booklet=  
computer  
co  
Select computer size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select legal-13 size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select 8.5 inch square size paper for booklet printing mode.  
CO  
booklet=  
legal13  
lg13  
LG13  
sq85  
letter-square  
8k  
booklet=  
SQ85  
booklet=  
8K  
Select 8K size paper for booklet printing mode.  
Select 16K size paper for booklet printing mode.  
booklet=  
16K  
16k  
In a job, if this value is LT, and in PDL too the data is for LT paper size, this will result in a  
scaled booklet on Letter paper. In a job, if this value is A3, and in PDL the data is for A4 paper  
size, this will result in a tiled booklet on A3 paper.  
When the Booklet Mode options is selected, the paper size is automatically set to the same size  
as for Booklet Mode. This function is only available for A3, A4, B4, Letter and Ledger paper  
sizes.  
If booklet mode is selected, then duplexing is also selected automatically (sduplex). Setting  
duplexing separately can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing.  
Example: The command to select the letter size paper for booklet printing mode is  
“lp –o booklet=letter filename”.  
— Page Layout  
The booklet mode page layout can be selected using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
left2right=off OFF  
Select right to left page layout for booklet printing mode.  
This value decides the layout of the pages in the booklet.  
If this value is OFF then the layout of pages is Right to Left as  
shown in the figure below.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
317  
   
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
left2right=on ON  
Select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode.  
This is the default setting.  
If the value is ON then the layout of the pages is from Left to  
Right as shown in the figure below.  
If left2right=off then long edge binding is selected, otherwise if left2right=on then short edge  
binding is used.  
Example: The command to select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode is  
“lp –o left2right=on filename”.  
— Center Margin  
The booklet mode center margin can be selected using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
centermargin  
Select the center margin value for booklet printing mode.  
=value  
This value specifies in pixels the Center Margin or the “Gutter”.  
This is in addition to the center margin already specified by the  
application. The valid range for value is 0 – 300. Default is 0.  
Example: The command to select the center margin value for booklet printing mode is  
“lp –o centremargin=value filename”.  
— Outer Margin  
The booklet mode outer margin can be selected using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
outermargin  
Select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode.  
=value  
This value specifies in pixels the Outer Margin or the “Creep”  
per page, which should take place while printing a booklet. The  
valid range for value is 0 – 18. Default is 0.  
Example: The command to select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode is  
“lp –o outermargin=value filename”.  
— Orientation  
The following orientation options are available.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
portrait  
Print the document in portrait orientation.  
318  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
           
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
landscape  
Print the document in landscape orientation.  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used.  
Example: The command to specify landscape orientation is “lp –o landscape filename”.  
— Font Pitch  
If the pitch is specified the net_est4511 program will always select the Courier font; otherwise  
the default font is used. The following options are used to select the font pitch.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
c
pitch=16.67 Set the character pitch to 16.67 characters per inch.  
10  
pitch=10  
pitch=12  
Set the character pitch to 10 characters per inch.  
Set the character pitch to 12 characters per inch.  
Set the character pitch to value characters per inch.  
12  
pitch=value  
In all the cases shown above the Courier font will also be selected. When the pitch is changed  
the font size will automatically be scaled to the appropriate size.  
If this option is not specified, the default pitch and font will be used.  
Example: The command to specify 8 characters per inch is “lp –o pitch=8 filename”.  
— Page Length  
The number of lines to print on a page can be specified with the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
pl=value  
Set the lines per page to value.  
As this equipment is a page printer we cannot change the physical length of a piece of paper so  
the actual effect of this command is to change the value for lines per inch so that the requested  
number of lines is printed on the page. The actual page length may differ from this value if the  
top margin or the text length option is used.  
If this option is not specified the PJL command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will  
be used. The minimum page length allowable is 5. If value is less than 5 page length is set to 5.  
The command to specify 66 lines per page is “lp –o pl=66 filename”.  
— Pure Black and Pure Gray  
The pure black and pure gray mode can be set using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
pureblackgray  
=0  
Disable the pure black mode and pure gray mode.  
pureblackgray  
=1  
Enable the pure black mode on.  
pureblackgray  
=2  
Enable only the pure gray mode on for PCL jobs.  
Enable the pure black and pure gray mode on for PS jobs.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
319  
           
Example: The command to set the pure black mode is “lp –o pureblackgray=1 filename”.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Pure Black and Pure Gray” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and  
e-STUDIO280 Series.  
PCL5e Specific Options  
Some of the options only apply to plain text or PCL5e files.  
— Text Wrapping  
The following options control text wrapping when it reaches the right margin.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
wrap  
Enable automatic text wrapping.  
Disable automatic text wrapping.  
nowrap  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used.  
Example: The command to specify wrapping is “lp –o wrap filename”.  
— Left Margin  
The left margin position can be specified with the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
lm=value  
Set the left margin to value columns.  
If the left margin is set to the right of the right margin it will be ignored.  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used.  
Example: The command to set the left margin to five columns is “lp –o lm=5 filename”.  
— Right Margin  
The right margin position can be specified with the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
rm=value  
Set the right margin to value columns.  
If the right margin is set to the left of the left margin or if it is set to a position wider than the log-  
ical page it will be ignored. The right margin is specified in columns from the left margin. A  
negative value will be ignored.  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used.  
Example: The command to set the right margin to fifty columns is “lp –o rm=50 filename”.  
320  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
             
— Top Margin  
The top margin position can be specified with the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
tm=value  
Set the top margin to value lines.  
If the top margin is set too high or too low part of the text may not appear due to the printer’s  
unprintable region. The top margin will be ignored if it is set to a value greater than the printer’s  
logical page length. Setting this value may affect the number of lines specified using the page  
length option.  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used.  
Example: The command to set the top margin to ten lines is “lp –o tm=10 filename”.  
— Text Length  
The text length can be specified using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
tl=value  
Set the length to value lines.  
If the text length is set too high, the part of the text may not appear due to the printer’s unprint-  
able area. The text length will be ignored if it is set to a value greater than the printer’s logical  
page length minus the top margin. The text length is specified in rows from the top margin. Set-  
ting this value may affect the number of lines specified using the page length option.  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used.  
Example: The command to set the text length to 40 lines is “lp -o tl=40 filename”.  
— Banner Page  
A banner page is automatically generated for each file in each job. The banner page contains the  
following items. The banner page is always sent as a PCL5e job.  
•
•
•
The name of the user that submitted the print job.  
The job ID number and from which workstation it was submitted.  
The title of the job. This title can be specified using the “-t” option. The same title is used for  
every file within a job. The default title is controlled by the “lp” command.  
A list of the options that were specified to print the job.  
The number of copies of the job that will be printed.  
The name of the printer or its IP address.  
•
•
•
•
•
The date and time when the job was printed according to the print server.  
A short summary listing the available options.  
Only one copy of the banner page is printed for each file, even if a number of copies of the job  
are requested. The banner page is sent to the equipment as a separate sub-job so that it is never  
stapled to the document.  
The banner page is printed with the following settings.  
•
•
•
•
•
Copies = 1.  
Stapling off.  
Orientation = portrait.  
Duplex off.  
Paper size as requested by the “-o” parameter or the printer’s default value.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
321  
           
•
The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different values than  
the job’s paper source and media type.  
•
•
•
•
•
Auto paper source selection or the requested banner page source or media type.  
Output bin as requested by the “-o” parameter or the printer default value.  
6 lines per inch  
Auto-wrap on.  
Automatic carriage-return when a line-feed is sent.  
NOTES:  
•
•
The banner page is designed to fit Statement / A5 and bigger paper. If the paper  
selected is smaller, the banner page may wrap onto two (2) pages.  
The default is that the banner page is printed before the job so that it is in the correct  
stacking order.  
•
•
When the language is set to “raw” the banner is always disabled.  
The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different  
values than the job’s paper source and media type. If a banner paper source is not  
specified then the auto source command is sent. If a banner media type is not spec-  
ified then no banner media type command is sent, so the printer’s default value will  
be used.  
•
If the file being printed specifies the paper destination or the paper size internally the  
banner page may print to the wrong output or on an incorrect paper size.  
Banner Options  
The banner page can be printed using the following options.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
banner=last  
banner=first  
nobanner  
Print the banner page after the job so that it will be physically on  
top of the job in the output tray.  
banner  
nb  
Print the banner page before the job so that it will be physically  
under the job in the output tray.  
Do not print a banner. The ability to specify the “nobanner”  
option can be disabled by the system administrator to force all  
jobs to print with a banner.  
The default value for this option is that the banner page prints first.  
Banner Paper Source  
The banner paper source can be specified using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
bauto-source  
btandem  
bexternal  
bupper  
Select the auto paper tray selection.  
Select the large capacity feeder.  
Select the upper drawer.  
bcas1  
bcas2  
bcas3  
bcas4  
Select the upper drawer.  
blower  
Select the lower drawer.  
bpedupper  
bpedlower  
Select the upper pedestal drawer.  
Select the lower pedestal drawer.  
322  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
   
If the banner paper source is not specified the PCL5e auto paper source command “<esc>&l7H”  
will be sent. The banner page source cannot be set to manual feed. The paper size always has  
priority over the paper source.  
Example: The command to specify that the banner page paper source is the LCF is  
“lp –o btandem filename”.  
Banner Media Type  
The banner page paper source can also be selected using the media type using the following  
option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
bmtype=Plain  
1
The paper source that contains Plain1 paper is requested.  
The paper source that contains transparency slides is requested.  
The paper source that contains Thick1 paper is requested.  
The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is requested.  
The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is requested.  
bmtype=Tran  
sparency  
bmtype=Thic  
k1  
bmtype=Thic  
k2  
bmtype=Thic  
k3  
The paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source.  
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be  
used to print the banner page.  
The command to specify that the banner page should print on a colored media type is  
“lp –o bmtype=Plain1 filename”.  
PS Specific Options  
Some of the options only apply to the PS files.  
— Black Over Print  
The black over print mode can be set using the following option.  
Option Value Alternate Description  
Value  
blackoverprint  
=0  
Disable the black over print mode.  
blackoverprint  
=1  
Enable the black over print mode.  
Example: The command to set the black over print mode is “lp –o blackoverprint=1 filename”.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series:  
The “Black Over Print” option is not available for e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280  
Series.  
Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX  
323  
       
Other Printing Methods  
This equipment also supports following printing methods:  
P.324 "FTP Printing"  
P.325 "Email Printing"  
FTP Printing  
FTP printing is available when the FTP print service is enabled on this equipment.  
You can print a document by sending the print file to this equipment using the FTP. This equip-  
ment can accept following files for printing:  
•
•
•
PCL file  
PS file  
Text file  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
In Windows, you can create the PCL file and PS file using the printer driver. To cre-  
ate the PCL file or PS file, change the printer port of the printer driver to “FILE:” port  
and print a document using the printer driver. For more information about printing to  
a file, refer to the Windows documentation.  
•
In Macintosh, you can crate the PS file using the printer driver. To create the PS file,  
select “File” at the “Destination” drop down box in the Print dialog box to print. For  
more information about printing to a file, refer to the Macintosh documentation.  
Printing a file using the FTP command  
The procedure below describes the example of printing using the FTP command with the  
MS-DOS Prompt.  
1. Launch the MS-DOS Prompt.  
2. Change the current directory to where the print file is located.  
3. Type following command and press the [Enter] key:  
ftp <IP Address>  
•
In the <IP Address> section, enter the IP address of this equipment.  
4. If it prompts you to enter the user name, enter the FTP Print  
User Name and press the [Enter] key.  
NOTE:  
•
It prompts you to enter the user name if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an  
administrator. Ask your administrator for the FTP Print User Name.  
5. If it prompts you to enter the password, enter the FTP Print  
Password and press the [Enter] key.  
NOTES:  
•
•
It prompts you to enter the password if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an  
administrator. Ask your administrator for the FTP Print Password.  
If the FTP Print User Name has been assigned but the FTP Print Password blank,  
do not enter when it prompts you to enter the password and press the [Enter] key.  
6. Type following command and press the [Enter] key:  
binary  
324  
Printing Guide — Other Printing Methods  
     
7. Type the following command and press the [Enter] key:  
put <file name>  
For example of the print file name is “sample.ps”:  
put sample.ps  
8. The file is sent to this equipment and spooled in the queue.  
Email Printing  
Email printing is available when enabled on this equipment.  
You can print a document by sending the print file, as an email attachment, to this equipment  
using the mail client software. This equipment can accept following files for printing:  
•
•
TIFF file  
Text file  
Printing a file using the email client  
The procedure below gives as example of printing using the Microsoft Outlook Express.  
NOTE:  
•
When you send an email message to this equipment to print a file, send the mes-  
sage in plain text format. If you send an email message in the HTML format, this  
equipment prints the HTML source code of the message.  
1. Open your email application and create new mail message.  
2. Enter the email address or the equipment in the To: line.  
3. Enter text in the Subject line or leave the Subject line blank.  
4. Enter text in the body field  
5. Attach the file you want to print.  
6. Send the email.  
NOTE:  
•
The header and body of the email will be printed only when the “Print Header” and  
“Print Message Body” for the Email print service is enabled on this equipment.  
Printing Guide — Other Printing Methods  
325  
     
326  
Printing Guide — Other Printing Methods  
4. MONITORING PRINT JOBS  
Printing Guide — 4. Monitoring Print Jobs  
327  
 
Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
TopAccessDocMon is a job monitoring tool that can remotely display and manage print jobs on  
the queues of the equipment and other compatible TOSHIBA printer controllers from the client  
computer.  
TopAccessDocMon supports device and job monitoring the following TOSHIBA controllers:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
e-STUDIO4511 Series  
e-STUDIO450 Series  
e-STUDIO280 Series  
GL-1020  
GL-1010  
SC-2  
SUPPLEMENT:  
NOTES:  
•
TopAccessDocMon also can monitor the device status of the devices that support  
MIB-II, Host Resource MIB, and Printer MIB.  
•
•
To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon, the equipment and your com-  
puter must be connected in the TCP/IP or IPX/SPX network.  
To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon, the SNMP Network Service  
must be enabled using TopAccess. Information about setting up the SNMP Net-  
work Service from the TopAccess is provided in the Network Administrator’s  
Guide.  
•
TopAccessDocMon is only available for Windows. To monitor and manage print  
jobs via a network environments, use TopAccess. Information about monitoring  
print jobs from the TopAccess is provided in the Network Operator’s Guide.  
Features and Functions  
The document monitor, TopAccessDocMon, follows the progress of each job from your com-  
puter desktop until it is printed on this equipment.  
TopAccessDocMon consists of the document monitor and a printer status component.  
„
„
The document monitor provides event notification (alerts).  
This means that if an event interrupts printing, such as a paper out condition, the monitor  
displays an alert.  
You can control which events cause TopAccessDocMon to display an alert.  
“Printer status” provides device-summary information and access to the print queues (Print  
queue, Private Print queue, Proof Print queue, Scheduled Print queue, Fax queue, e-Filing  
queue, and Invalid queue).  
How to Use TopAccessDocMon  
Running TopAccessDocMon  
To access the TopAccessDocMon window, you must first activate it.  
— Starting TopAccessDocMon  
First, load TopAccessDocMon so its icon appears on the Windows operating system taskbar.  
You only need to do this once.  
1. Click the [Start] menu.  
328  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
           
2. Select [TOSHIBA e-STUDIO Client] in the [Programs] menu,  
and click [TOSHIBA e-STUDIO TopAccessDocMon].  
•
The TopAccessDocMon icon appears in the taskbar.  
— Document Monitor Taskbar Menu  
After TopAccessDocMon is activated, you can access its functions from the Document Monitor  
menu (display from the TopAccessDocMon icon in the taskbar).  
The following menus appears in the Document Monitor taskbar menu:  
•
Disable/Enable — This allows you to enable or disable document monitoring.  
To turn on document monitoring, click [Enable] from the Document Monitor menu. The  
option changes to Disable and displays the TopAccessDocMon icon on the taskbar. Click  
[Disable] to terminate document monitoring.  
•
Configure — This allows you to configure how TopAccessDocMon monitors the devices.  
When this is selected, the configuration dialog box appears.  
P.329 "Configuring TopAccessDocMon"  
•
•
Exit — This allows you to exit TopAccessDocMon.  
TopAccessDocMon — This allows you to display the TopAccessDocMon window for the  
default printer.  
P.339 "TopAccessDocMon Window"  
•
TopAccess — This allows you to access TopAccess on the default printer. This is available  
only when the default printer is set to either the e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450  
Series, e-STUDIO280 Series, GL-1020, or GL-1010.  
Configuring TopAccessDocMon  
The configuration dialog box allows you to set startup options, select notification events and  
methods, display or modify refresh rates, and manually update device discovery settings.  
In the configuration dialog box, the following tabs are displayed:  
•
Startup — This controls whether TopAccessDocMon is launched when starting Windows.  
P.330 "Configuring the Start Up Options"  
•
Notification — This controls which printing events cause a popup message or beep alert.  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
329  
         
P.330 "Configuring the Notifications"  
•
•
Refresh Rates — This controls how often the Document Monitor searches for event notifi-  
cations, printer status, and print queue contents in order to refresh the information displayed.  
Refresh rates are also known as polling rates.  
P.331 "Changing the Refresh Rate"  
Installed — This shows the network address associated with each installed printer driver.  
P.333 "Finding the Printer Address"  
Accessing configuration  
To display the configuration dialog box, right-click the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar  
and select [Configure] from the Document Monitor menu. You can also access the configuration  
dialog box by double-clicking on the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar.  
To close the dialog box without changing settings, click [Cancel].  
— Configuring the Start Up Options  
In the Startup tab, you can set TopAccessDocMon to launch when starting Windows.  
1
1) Run the document monitor when starting Windows  
Check this to run TopAccessDocMon when starting Windows. When this is checked, the  
TopAccessDocMon icon will automatically appear in the task bar every time you start Win-  
dows.  
— Configuring the Notifications  
In the Notification tab, you can enable or disable the events notified by TopAccessDocMon.  
1
2
1) Events  
This sets the events which are notified. To enable or disable the notification of each event,  
click the arrow button in the right. The events list is displayed, and you can check on/off  
events that enable or disable notification.  
330  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
             
•
•
•
Document has been printed successfully — Check this to notify you when the printer  
is finished printing the document.  
Private print document is being held — Check this to notify you when a private print  
job that you have sent is ready for you to walk over to the printer and release.  
Proof set has been printed — Check this to notify you when the printer has printed the  
first copy of your multi-copy job, which is ready for your review before releasing and  
printing the remaining copies.  
•
•
Fax has been transmitted successfully — Check this to notify you when the printer has  
sent a fax when you have sent using the N/W-Fax driver. This is only available when the  
Fax option is installed to the devices.  
Document has been cancelled by the printer — Check this to notify you when the  
printer has cancelled the job. This can happen when a paper size is not available and the  
timeout has expired. This event occurs only when catastrophic circumstances force the  
printer to cancel the job, such as a missing byte or memory failure. Expired private print  
or proof print jobs are never cancelled by the printer.  
•
•
•
•
Document cannot be printed due to error — Check this to notify you when the printer  
is unable to print the job.  
Printer has a paper jam — Check this to notify you when there is a paper jam in the  
printer.  
Printer is offline — Check this to notify you when the printer is off line. This is only  
available for GL-1010, GL-1020, and SC-2.  
Drawer is out of paper — Check this to notify you when one of the printer drawers is  
out of paper. This drawer may not be the drawer the printer is using for your job.  
Printer door is open — Check this to notify you when the cover on the printer is open.  
Printer requires attention — Check this to notify you when the printer requires imme-  
diate attention.  
•
•
•
•
Toner is Empty — Check this to notify you when a toner is empty.  
Used Toner Container is full — Check this to notify you when the used toner container  
is full.  
2) Method  
This sets how TopAccessDocMon notifies you when events occur.  
•
•
Popup Dialog — Check this for a popup dialog box.  
Audio (Beep) — Check this for a beep sound.  
— Changing the Refresh Rate  
The Refresh Rate tab lets you change the refresh rate for document notification, printer status,  
and print queue.  
1
2
3
1) Item/Refresh Rate  
This list displays the refresh rate settings for each item. You can change the refresh rate by  
selecting the item in this list and clicking [Change Rate...].  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
331  
     
2) [Restore Defaults]  
Click this to restore the default refresh rate for each item.  
3) [Change Rate...]  
Select an item in the list and click it to change the refresh rate. The Document Notification,  
Printer Status, and Print Queue dialog box appears.  
P.332 "Changing the refresh rate"  
Changing the refresh rate  
The Document Notification, Printer Status, and Print Queue dialog box appears when clicking  
[Change Rate...] in the Refresh Rate tab of the configuration dialog box.  
When the dialog box appears, select the desired refresh rate using the slide bar. The available  
range of the refresh rate varies for each item.  
Document Notification  
You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 1 minute in units of 10 seconds. The default refresh  
rate for the document notification is 30 seconds.  
Printer Status  
You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 5 minute in units of 30 seconds. The default refresh  
rate for the document notification is 1 minute.  
332  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
       
Print Queue  
You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 1 minute in units of 10 seconds. The default refresh  
rate for the document notification is 10 seconds.  
— Finding the Printer Address  
The Installed tab displays the network IP address of each device on your computer that has a  
printer driver installed.  
1
2
3
4
1) Printer Name  
This displays the printer driver name.  
2) Port  
This displays the port on your computer to which the printer driver is connected.  
3) IP/IPX Address  
This displays the IP address or IPX address of the printer the printer driver maps.  
4) [Update]  
Click this to update the printer address information.  
Monitoring the Printer  
How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window  
To display the TopAccessDocMon window that displays the print job information and printer  
status, access either from the Document Monitor menu or Printers menu.  
— Accessing from the Document Monitor Menu  
You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the Document Monitor menu and control  
it from the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar.  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
333  
           
Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Document Monitor menu  
1. Right-click the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar.  
2. In the menu displayed, select “TopAccessDocMon” to access  
the TopAccessDocMon window.  
•
The TopAccessDocMon window appears.  
NOTES:  
•
•
TopAccessDocMon displays the TopAccessDocMon window for the printer set as a  
default printer in the Printers folder. If the default printer is set to other than the  
TOSHIBA printer driver, it displays the error message and the TopAccessDocMon  
window cannot be displayed.  
If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver, a mes-  
sage dialog box appears. In this case, click [Yes] to search for a printer and main-  
tain the connection.  
P.335 "Searching for a Printer"  
— Accessing from the Printers File Menu  
You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the File menu of the Printers folder. When  
you access TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu, the TopAccessDocMon window for  
the selected printer.  
Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu  
1. Open the Printers folder and select the printer driver.  
2. Click the [File] menu and select [TopAccessDocMon].  
•
The TopAccessDocMon window for the selected printer appears.  
334  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
 
NOTE:  
•
If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver, a mes-  
sage dialog box appears. In this case, click [Yes] to search for a printer and main-  
tain the connection.  
P.335 "Searching for a Printer"  
— Searching for a Printer  
When you activate TopAccessDocMon, if the printer driver you select is not connected correctly  
to the printer, a message dialog box appears.  
In this case, you can use the printer discovery functions to search the printer automatically in the  
network, or enter the printer address manually.  
P.335 "Finding a printer by searching automatically"  
P.336 "Finding a printer by entering printer address manually"  
Finding a printer by searching automatically  
1. Click [Yes] in the message dialog box to find a printer.  
•
The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Start Discovery] to begin the process.  
•
TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network.  
SUPPLEMENTS:  
•
•
You can quit the process by clicking [Stop Discovery].  
It may not find the device that is located in the different segment. If a device cannot  
be found, find a device manually from the [Manual Selection] button.  
P.336 "Finding a printer by entering printer address manually"  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
335  
           
•
•
If the process continues for a long time, it is because too many network clients are in  
the network. Also, you must change the discover settings if you want to search for a  
printer in the IPX/SPX network. In these cases, please configure the discovery set-  
tings using the [Advanced] button.  
P.338 "Configuring Discovery Settings"  
When th equipment is connected to the IPX/SPX network of the NDS or NDPS envi-  
ronment, the equipment cannot be discovered on Windows 98/Me. In this case,  
please configure the connection manually.  
P.336 "Finding a printer by entering printer address manually"  
3. When the process is complete, the printers that have been  
found are listed in the list.  
4. Select the printers that you want to monitor from the list and  
click [OK].  
•
TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and displays the  
TopAccessDocMon window.  
NOTE:  
•
If you select a different device from the default printer driver (when you run TopAc-  
cessDocMon by selecting [TopAccessDocMon] from the Document Monitor menu in  
the task bar) or the selected printer driver (when you run TopAccessDoMon by  
selecting a printer driver in the Printers folder and selecting [TopAccessDocMon] in  
the File menu), the message “This printer is different from default printer. Continue  
to open TopAccessDocMon, please click ‘Yes’.” is displayed. If this message is dis-  
played, click [No] and select a correct device.  
Finding a printer by entering printer address manually  
1. Click [Yes] in the message dialog box to find a printer.  
•
The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
336  
     
2. Click [Manual Selection].  
•
The Manual Selection dialog box appears.  
3. Enter each item to specify the printer address and click [OK].  
IP Address — Enter the IP address of the printer.  
IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only when  
the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the  
computer is connected to the NetWare server.  
Name — Enter the printer name.  
Location — Enter the location of the printer.  
NOTE:  
•
You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
337  
 
4. Entered printer is added in the list. Select a printer that you  
want to monitor from the list and click [OK].  
•
TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and display the  
TopAccessDocMon window.  
NOTE:  
•
If you select a different device from the default printer driver (when you run TopAc-  
cessDocMon by selecting [TopAccessDocMon] from the Document Monitor menu in  
the task bar) or the selected printer driver (when you run TopAccessDoMon by  
selecting a printer driver in the Printers folder and selecting [TopAccessDocMon] in  
the File menu), the message “This printer is different from default printer. Continue  
to open TopAccessDocMon, please click ‘Yes’.” is displayed. If this message is dis-  
played, click [No] and select a correct device.  
Configuring Discovery Settings  
You can configure the discovery settings.  
1) Devices  
Click the arrow button to display the poll down list and check the model name that you want  
to search.  
338  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
   
2) Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search  
Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX/SPX network. This is available  
only when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the  
computer is connected to the NetWare server.  
3) Network - Enable TCP/IP Search  
Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP/IP network. This is available only  
when the TCP/IP protocol is installed in your computer.  
When this is enabled, select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in the TCP/  
IP network.  
•
•
Search local subnet — Select this to search for printers in local subnet.  
Specify a range — Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IP addresses.  
When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in “From” field and “To” field to specify the  
range.  
TopAccessDocMon Window  
In the TopAccessDocMon window, you can monitor print jobs and printer status.  
This window consists of:  
•
A menu bar containing the options Printer, Document, View, and Help. The Device Status  
tab includes only the Printer, View and Help menus.  
•
There are nine (9) possible tabbed views: Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof  
Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, TopAccessComposer, and Invalid. The tabs displayed  
vary depending on the printer being monitored.  
•
A status bar containing icons and text that allow you to quickly see the status of the printer.  
„
Menu Bar Options  
The options are:  
•
•
Printer > Close — Closes the current window.  
Printer > Change Printer — The device names that have been added to the monitoring list  
are displayed. You can change the monitoring device by selecting the device name.  
P.342 "Changing Monitoring Devices"  
•
•
Document > Cancel — This menu is displayed under all queue tab. This item allows you to  
delete the print job from the queue. You can only cancel print jobs that you submitted.  
Document > Release Proof — This menu is displayed under the Proof Print tab. This item  
displays the Release Proof dialog box where the number of copies to be printed can be  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
339  
           
changed and the job released for printing (added to the current jobs print queue). You can  
only release jobs that you submitted.  
P.347 "Monitoring Queues"  
•
Document > Print Now — This menu is displayed under the Scheduled Print tab. This item  
overrides the assigned print schedule order for a particular job and prints the selected job  
immediately.  
P.347 "Monitoring Queues"  
•
•
Document > Release — This menu is displayed under the Invalid tab. This item displays  
the Invalid Release dialog box where the department code is entered and the job is released  
for printing.  
View > Configure — Displays the Configuration window.  
P.329 "Configuring TopAccessDocMon"  
•
•
•
•
View > Refresh — Renews the window display.  
View > Status Bar — Check or uncheck to display or hide the status bar.  
Help > Contents and Index — Accesses the online help application.  
Help > About TopAccessDocMon — Displays copyright, version, and other information  
about the Document Monitor.  
„
Document Monitoring Tabs  
The tabs on this window vary depending on the monitoring device:  
e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series — Device Status,  
Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, and Invalid  
GL-1020 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax,  
TopAccessComposer, and Invalid  
GL-1010 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax,  
TopAccessComposer, and Invalid  
SC-2 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, and Proof Print.  
Other devices (that supports MIB-II, Host Resource MIB, and Printer MIB) — Device Status  
•
•
Device Status tab — Displays the printer information.  
Print Queue tab — Displays a list of all current jobs. Using this tab you can display all the  
jobs in the print queue, pause and resume printing, and cancel a print job.  
Private Print tab — Lists the confidential print jobs. Using this tab you can display all your  
private print jobs and cancel jobs as needed.  
Proof Print tab — Displays details of proof print jobs. Proof print jobs are those for which  
a proof copy has already been printed but the balance remaining is being held in this queue.  
You can display all proof print jobs that have not been printed, release the rest of the docu-  
ment for printing, and cancel a print job — as needed.  
•
•
•
Scheduled Print tab — Displays details of jobs that are being held for printing at a speci-  
fied date and time.  
•
•
•
Fax tab — Displays details of fax jobs that are being sent using the N/W-Fax driver.  
e-Filing tab — Displays details of documents that are being stored in Box about one minute.  
TopAccessComposer tab — Displays details of documents that are being stored in TopAc-  
cessComposer about one minute.  
•
Invalid tab — Lists jobs with invalid department codes.  
„
Status Bar  
The status bar extends along the lower border of the TopAccessDocMon window. The informa-  
tion it contains depends upon the tab you’ve chosen.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can choose whether or not to display the status bar by checking/unchecking the  
Status Bar option using the View menu.  
340  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
         
1) Status  
Located on the left side of the bar, is a phrase that describes the status of the device or job:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Device Status tab — shows the condition of the printer.  
Print Queue tab — shows the number of documents in the print queue.  
Private Print tab — shows the number of private print jobs.  
Proof Print tab — shows the number of proof print jobs.  
Scheduled Print tab — shows the order of scheduled print jobs for the selected device.  
Fax tab — shows the number of fax jobs.  
e-Filing tab — shows the number of print jobs to be sent to Box.  
TopAccessComposer tab — shows the number of print jobs to be sent to TopAccess-  
Composer.  
•
Invalid — shows the number of print jobs in the Invalid print queue.  
2) IP/IPX Address  
This item on the taskbar shows the IP address or IPX address for the device connected to the  
selected printer.  
3) Connection Status  
The icon shows the communication status of the printer.  
Shows that TopAccessDocMon is communicating with the printer.  
Shows that the communications link between TopAccessDocMon and the  
printer is broken and displays the message The printer is not responding.  
TopAccessDocMon periodically tries to reestablish the link. How frequently this is done  
depends upon the refresh rate.  
Warnings display in yellow and errors in red. Clicking the primary icon (the first one) takes  
you to the TopAccessDocMon window.  
4) Printer Icon  
Click the printer icon to update the information.  
— Checking Device Status  
In the Device Status tab, you can check the printer status.  
8
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
10  
The printer information includes:  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
341  
   
1) Printer Image  
This displays a visual representation of the printer, showing the device status icon when an  
error condition occurs.  
P.364 "Device Status Indicators"  
2) Name  
This displays the name of the printer.  
3) Model  
This displays the printer model name.  
4) Location  
This displays the printer’s physical location.  
5) Status  
This tells you if the machine is ready for printing.  
6) Hole Punch  
This displays the type of hole punch unit installed.  
7) Physical Address  
This displays the printer’s machine address (a unique ID provided by the printer’s network  
card, also referred to as the hardware address.)  
8) Printer Information  
This displays the drawer status icon along with the errors and warnings that have been  
recorded for the printer. Shows drawer status and provides machine information such as  
toner low, door open, paper jam, etc. Also it provides the alert and counter information.  
9) Description (list box below Printer Information)  
This highlights the method of recovery for the alert selected above.  
10) [Add Device]  
Click this to add a new device to be monitored. The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery  
dialog box appears.  
P.342 "Adding Devices"  
— Changing Monitoring Devices  
You can change the device to display the details in the TopAccessDocMon window.  
To change the device, click the [Printer] menu, [Change Printer], and select the device name of  
which the details are displayed in the TopAccessDocMon window.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can add the device name in the Change Printer menu by clicking [Add Device]  
in the Device Status tab.  
P.342 "Adding Devices"  
— Adding Devices  
You can add the devices to be monitored by TopAccessDocMon.  
To add the new device, you can use the TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery function. You  
can add the printer by automatically searching the printer in your network, or entering the printer  
address manually.  
342  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
     
Adding new device by searching the printer automatically  
1. Click [Add Device] in the Device Status tab.  
•
The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Start Discovery] to begin the process.  
•
TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
•
You can quit the process by clicking [Stop Discovery].  
It may not find the device that is located in the different segment. If a device cannot  
be found, find a device manually from the [Manual Selection] button.  
P.345 "Adding new device by entering the printer address manually"  
3. When the process is complete, the printers that have been  
found are listed in the “Discovered Device” list.  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
343  
         
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
If the process continues for a long time, it is because too many network clients are  
on the network. Also, you must change the discover settings if you want to search  
for a printer in the IPX/SPX network. In this case, you can configure the discovery  
settings using the [Advanced] button.  
P.346 "Configuring Network Discovery Settings"  
4. Select the printers that you want to monitor from the “Discov-  
ered Device” list and click [Add].  
•
The selected printer is added to the “Monitoring Device” list.  
SUPPLEMENT:  
•
You can remove the printers from the “Monitoring Device” list. To do this, select the  
printer that you want to remove and click [Remove]. However, you cannot remove  
the printers which are related to the installed printer drivers.  
5. Click [OK].  
344  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
 
Adding new device by entering the printer address manually  
1. Click [Add Device] in the Device Status tab.  
•
The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears.  
2. Click [Manual Selection].  
•
The Manual Selection dialog box appears.  
3. Enter each item to specify the printer address.  
IP Address — Enter the IP address of the printer.  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
345  
       
IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only when  
the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the  
computer is connected to the NetWare server.  
Name — Enter the printer name.  
Location — Enter the location of the printer.  
NOTE:  
•
You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.  
4. Entered printer is added in the “Monitoring Device” list. Click  
[OK].  
Configuring Network Discovery Settings  
You can configure the discovery settings for the Network Discovery in the Discovery Settings  
dialog box.  
1) Devices - Find TOSHIBA Devices  
Check on this to search only for TOSHIBA devices in your network, such as the  
e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, e-STUDIO280 Series, GL-1020, GL-1010  
and SC-2.  
2) Devices - Find All Devices on the Network  
Check on this to search for all compatible devices can be detected.  
346  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
     
3) Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search  
Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX/SPX network. This is available  
only when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the  
computer is connected to the NetWare server.  
4) Network - Enable TCP/IP Search  
Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP/IP network. This is available only  
when the TCP/IP protocol is installed in your computer.  
When this is enabled, select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in the TCP/  
IP network.  
•
•
Search local subnet — Select this to search for printers in local subnet.  
Specify a range — Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IP addresses.  
When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in the “From” field and “To” field to specify  
the range.  
— Monitoring Queues  
Each of the TopAccessDocMon job status tabs display essentially the same information.  
The Queue tabs on the TopAccessDocMon window are vary depending on the monitoring  
device:  
e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series — Print Queue, Pri-  
vate Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, and Invalid  
GL-1020 — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAccessComposer,  
and Invalid  
GL-1010 — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAccessComposer,  
and Invalid  
SC-2 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, and Proof Print.  
„
•
•
Job status information  
Document Name — is the name of the document that is printing.  
Status — is the state or condition of the job.  
•
Scheduled — for Scheduled Print jobs, this item displays the date and time the job is sched-  
uled to print in localized form.  
•
•
•
•
User Name — identifies who submitted the job.  
Pages — shows the pages in the job and number of pages printed.  
Submitted — is the date and time that the print job was submitted.  
Copies — this item contains the number of copies requested.  
In each queue tab, you can delete a print job that you originally submitted.  
In addition, in the Proof Print tab, you can print the remaining copies of proof print jobs. In the  
Scheduled Print tab, you can print the selected scheduled job immediately. In the Invalid tab,  
you can print the selected job by entering the department code.  
Deleting print jobs  
1. Display the queue tab and select a print job that you want to  
delete.  
NOTE:  
•
You can delete the print job only that you originally submitted.  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
347  
   
2. Click [Document] menu and select [Cancel].  
•
The selected job is deleted.  
Releasing proof print documents  
1. Display the Proof Print tab and select a proof print job that  
you want to print of remaining copies.  
NOTE:  
•
You can release the proof print job only that you originally submitted.  
2. Click [Document] menu and select [Release Proof].  
•
The Release Proof dialog box appears.  
3. Enter the number of copies and click [OK].  
•
The remaining copies of the proof print job are printed.  
348  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
   
Releasing scheduled print documents immediately  
1. Display the Scheduled Print tab and select a scheduled print  
job that you want to print immediately.  
NOTE:  
•
You can release the scheduled print job only that you originally submitted.  
2. Click [Document] menu and select [Print Now].  
•
The selected scheduled print job is immediately printed.  
Releasing invalid print documents  
1. Display the Invalid Print tab and select a print job that you  
want to print.  
NOTE:  
•
You can release the print job only that you originally submitted.  
2. Click [Document] menu and select [Release].  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
349  
   
•
The Invalid Release dialog box appears.  
3. Enter the 5-digit department code and click [OK].  
•
The selected invalid print job is printed.  
Event Notification  
When an event occurs that has been assigned alert status (selected for notification), a popup noti-  
fication dialog box appears. This popup message contains the following information about the  
event:  
NOTE:  
•
If you did not select Popup Message as the notification method, you will not see a  
popup notification dialog box.  
•
•
•
•
Date/Time — displays the date and time of the document.  
Document — displays the name of the document.  
Message — displays the event notification message.  
Notification Number — displays the sequential order of the current message in the notifica-  
tion queue. For example, 3/8 indicates that it is the third message in a queue of eight notifi-  
cations.  
•
•
•
— Click this to display the first notification dialog box in the queue.  
— Click this to display the previous notification dialog box in the queue.  
— Click this to display the next notification dialog box in the queue.  
•
•
— Click this to display the last notification dialog box in the queue.  
Close — closes the window.  
350  
Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon  
 
5. TROUBLESHOOTING  
Printing Guide — 5. Troubleshooting  
351  
 
When Printing cannot be Performed  
NOTE:  
•
This problem can arise as the result of a hardware malfunction, a network communi-  
cation or configuration problem. Before troubleshooting the client error, ask your  
administrator to troubleshoot the hardware or network errors. Those troubleshoot-  
ing are described in the Network Administrator’s Guide.  
The following checklist helps you identify the source of the error and directs to you where you  
can find more information about resolving it.  
Client Error for Windows Platform  
No Check...  
Yes  
No  
For Instruction, Go To...  
1
2
3
Have you ever printed suc-  
cessfully from this client  
workstation?  
P.355 "Driver Mapped to  
Wrong Port"  
Next Step  
Ö
Ø
Do you set up the printer  
driver other than a SMB con-  
nection?  
P.356 "Cannot Print a Job  
Using SMB"  
Next Step  
Ö
Ö
Ø
Open TopAccessDocMon  
and note the taskbar connec-  
tion icon and status bar mes-  
sage. Is this equipment  
responding?  
P.357 "The Device is Not  
Responding"  
Next Step  
Ø
4
Try resubmitting the job.  
Does the printer status read  
“Document has printed suc-  
cessfully”?  
P.357 "Cannot Interpret  
TopAccessDocMon Messages/  
Warnings/Errors"  
End  
Ö
Client Error for Macintosh Platform  
No Check...  
Yes  
No  
For Instruction, Go To...  
1
Is this equipment you created  
selected in the Chooser?  
P.169 "Installing the Printer  
on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"  
End  
Ö
Print Job Status Messages  
The status and result of the print jobs is indicated as following in the Print Job page in the Job  
Status tab and Print Log page in the Logs tab.  
Error Code  
Cause  
Corrective Action  
PM size error  
1200 dpi print jobs cannot be printed  
without the optional expansion memory.  
Send a print job with a 600 dpi setting.  
402F  
Print enable error  
Please purchase the Printer Kit or Printer/  
Scanner Kit if you want to use the print-  
ing function.  
4030  
HDD full error  
Job canceled  
Delete unnecessary private print jobs and  
invalid department print jobs.  
4031  
A221  
(Job was canceled.)  
352  
Printing Guide — When Printing cannot be Performed  
   
Error Code  
Cause  
Corrective Action  
Power failure  
Check if the power cable is connected  
properly and it is inserted securely.  
Check if the power voltage is unstable.  
A222  
Printing Guide — When Printing cannot be Performed  
353  
Printer Driver Errors  
Printer Driver Installation Error Messages  
Setup Needs to Copy Windows NT Files  
Problem Description  
The wrong port type was selected from the Printer Ports dialog.  
Corrective Action  
1. Click Cancel until the Add Printer Wizard terminates.  
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder but, when prompted to select a port,  
choose Local Port.  
Client Software CD Now Required  
Problem Description  
When adding a new printer driver, the end user did not choose the Have Disk option; instead, he  
selected the printer name from the Add Printer list.  
Corrective Action  
1. Cancel the Add Printer Wizard.  
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder but, when prompted to locate the driver,  
click Have Disk.  
3
Select Use Existing Driver to add another copy of an existing driver or browse to the subdi-  
rectory that contains the appropriate *.inf file.  
File *.DRV on Client CD Count Not Be Found  
Problem Description  
When adding a new printer driver, the user did not choose the Have Disk option but selected the  
printer name from the Add Printer list.  
Corrective Action  
1. Cancel the Add Printer Wizard.  
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder, but when prompted to locate the driver,  
click Have Disk.  
3. Browse to the subdirectory that contains the appropriate *.inf file.  
Location Does Not Contain Information About Your  
Hardware  
Problem Description  
The path to the *.inf file selected during driver installation is too far away. In other words, there  
are too many characters in the directory path.  
Corrective Action  
Copy the directory containing the *.inf file to the local drive and resume installation.  
This Port is Currently in Use  
Problem Description  
The driver was either open, printing a job, or is in use by another printer or application, when  
you attempted to delete it.  
354  
Printing Guide — Printer Driver Errors  
             
Corrective Action  
Make sure all print jobs have completed before deleting a port. If there are still problems, exit all  
applications and try again. Check each driver to see if another driver is using the same port. If so,  
first change the driver’s port setting and delete the port.  
Problem with the Current Printer Setup  
Problem Description  
The driver was not set up properly, possibly because the installation procedure did not complete.  
Corrective Action  
Delete the driver and either reinstall it from the distribution CD-ROM or download it from this  
equipment.  
Printer Driver General Errors  
Driver Mapped to Wrong Port  
Problem Description  
If the printer driver on a client workstation points to the wrong network port, jobs do not appear  
in the current jobs queue or print out.  
Corrective Action  
1. Open the Printers folder from the Control Panel.  
2. Right-click the printer driver icon.  
3. Select Properties from the shortcut menu.  
4. Depending on the operating system, select the following tab:  
•
•
In Windows 98/Me — Select Details. Browse to select the printer or Novell queue.  
In Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003 — Select Ports. Add a new port and map it to  
the printer.  
5. Make sure that the path to the printer and the device name are correct.  
\\<device name>\print  
•
Where <device name> is the same as the device name set from the Touch Panel Display.  
6. Click the General Tab and click Print Test Page to confirm that the settings are correct.  
Command Line Options Not Processed  
Problem Description  
All print options are sent to this equipment at the start of the print job. If the print file already  
contains print commands, they override the command line options you set. For example, if the  
print file specifies the Letter media, and you specify the A4 media option with the lp command,  
the document is output on letter size paper (provided, of course, that all copier-related restric-  
tions have been met).  
Corrective Action  
Change the properties in the document you want to print and recreate the print file. Submit the  
print job using the LP command without setting additional parameters.  
Printing Guide — Printer Driver Errors  
355  
         
Cannot Remember Document Password  
Problem Description  
There is no way to obtain the Document Identification Number (DIN) for a Private Print job  
after it has been sent. A private print job remains in the queue until the correct Document Pass-  
word is entered.  
Corrective Action  
The end user must delete the job from the Touch Panel Display or through TopAccessDocMon  
and resubmit the Private Print job using a new DIN. Encourage the user to write down the DIN  
so they can enter it to retrieve their jobs from the Touch Panel Display.  
Retrieval of Printer Configuration Failed  
Problem Description  
When accessing the printer properties, the system displayed “Retrieval of printer configuration  
failed”.  
Corrective Action  
If the printer driver cannot communicate with this equipment — Verify that the system is run-  
ning. If not, turn it on. Connect to this equipment via TopAccess. If you cannot connect, reboot  
this equipment. If that fails, check the printer driver port assignment to make sure it is correct.  
Cannot Print a Job Using SMB  
Problem Description  
When printing a document using a SMB connection, the job cannot be printed because an error  
such as “No more connections can be made to this remote computer” and “Your file could not be  
printed due to an error” are continuously displayed.  
Corrective Action  
It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT 4.0, Win-  
dows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is recommended to set up  
for printing via Windows print server. For further information about setting up printing via a  
Windows print server, see the Network Administrator’s Guide.  
If you cannot use a Windows print server in your network, use Peer-to-Peer printing for Win-  
dows 98/Me, and LPR printing for Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003.  
Cannot Print a Job as Expected Using PS Printer Driver  
Problem Description  
When “Use PostScript Passthrough” in the PostScript Settings dialog box is enabled, the equip-  
ment cannot print a document correctly because an application may output the PostScript code  
that the equipment cannot read.  
Corrective Action  
Disable “Use PostScript Passthrough” in the PostScript Settings dialog box and print a docu-  
ment.  
356  
Printing Guide — Printer Driver Errors  
         
TopAccessDocMon Errors  
TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions  
The Device is Not Responding  
Problem Description  
The status bar reads, “The device is not responding” and the broken connection icon is displayed  
in the taskbar.  
Technically, this icon means that the SNMP manager on the client machine cannot communicate  
with the SNMP agent on this equipment. Several error conditions can cause this status:  
•
•
•
•
The network connection between the client and the device has been broken.  
The device IP Address has changed and the client is still using the old address.  
The device is currently rebooting.  
The SNMP agent on the device is not functioning properly or has stopped functioning.  
Corrective Action  
1. Make sure that the SNMP Network Service is enabled from the Network Setup page in the  
TopAccess Administrator mode.  
2. Wait for a couple of minutes. Most of the time, the connection is reestablished automati-  
cally.  
3. If the broken connection condition persists, exit and restart TopAccessDocMon.  
4. If, upon restarting TopAccessDocMon, you receive a message that the address cannot be  
resolved, manually discover and select the device.  
P.335 "Searching for a Printer"  
Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue  
Problem Description  
After submitting a job to print, there are several reasons why you may not see the job in the print  
queue:  
•
•
•
•
The wrong device selected.  
The job is queued on the Windows operating system print spooler.  
The job may be held in the Novell print queue.  
A copier error prevents printing.  
Corrective Action  
•
•
Check the device location to see if there really should be any jobs listed.  
Check the Jobs Log in TopAccess to see if the status of the job is listed as Done, Deleted, or  
Unserviceable.  
•
If the job is very small, it may have already been serviced and moved to the Jobs Log as a  
terminated job. If the job was unserviceable for some reason, it no longer appears in the  
under Current Jobs list.  
•
•
Look at the Touch Panel Display for error messages. For instance, a prompt to load paper  
holds up subsequent jobs in the queue.  
In a Peer to Peer environment, the job may be queued on the Microsoft Windows operating  
system print spooler and, consequently, not available in Current Jobs or the Jobs Log. If you  
do not see any error messages and the printer seems to be working fine, resubmit the job.  
The job may be in the Novell print queue and thus, not visible for the moment. Use NWAd-  
min or PCONSOLE to see if there are any queue errors.  
•
Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages/Warn-  
ings/Errors  
Problem Description  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
357  
             
The device status indicates the current state of the copier to which print jobs are being submitted.  
Corrective Action  
For an explanation of device status messages, refer to the following section.  
P.358 "TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages"  
P.359 "TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages"  
TopAccessDocMon Error Messages  
TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages  
The following table shows the notification messages displayed and helps you to find more infor-  
mation about resolving it.  
Message  
Description  
Your document has been  
printed.  
User has sent a print job and it has finished printing success-  
fully.  
Your private print document User has sent a private print job and it is ready for the user to  
is now being held.  
walk to copier and activate the job.  
Your proof set has been  
printed.  
User has sent a private print job and a proof copy of a  
multi-copy job has printed, and it is ready for the user to  
review before releasing and printing the remaining copies.  
Your fax has been transmitted User has sent a fax job and it has finished faxing successfully.  
successfully.  
Your document has been can- User had sent a print job and it has been changed to a cancelled  
celled.  
state. This can happen when a paper size is not available and  
the timeout has expired. Ensure proper paper has been set to  
this equipment and resubmit the job.  
If this message is notified after sending a private, proof, or  
scheduled print job, the private or proof print job was cancelled  
before it was put into a held state. This may occur because of a  
missing byte or memory failure. In this case, ask your admin-  
istrator to maintain the available hard disk space to store the  
jobs, or delete the unnecessary jobs stored and resubmit the  
job.  
Your document cannot be  
printed due to error.  
User has sent a print job and it was rendered unserviceable by  
this equipment. Make sure you use the correct printer driver.  
The printer has a paper jam. A paper jam has occurred. Remove the jam and resubmit the  
job.  
The printer is offline.  
The printer is offline. This may be displayed by monitoring  
other TOSHIBA device, such as GL-1020, GL-1010, SC-2, so  
on. Turn the printer online and resubmit the job.  
The printer is out of paper.  
The printer door is open.  
One of the drawers is out of paper. Add paper.  
One of the doors is opened. Close the door.  
The printer requires attention. An error has occurred. Go to the Touch Panel Display to see  
the type of error. For more details on resolving the error, refer  
to the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function or consult your  
network administrator.  
358  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
   
Message  
Description  
The yellow toner is Empty.  
The magenta toner is Empty.  
The cyan toner is Empty.  
The black toner is Empty.  
One of the toner cartridges is empty. Replace it.  
The used toner container is  
full.  
The toner bag is full. Replace the toner bag.  
TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages  
The following table shows the printer status messages displayed in the Device Status tab and  
helps you to find more information about resolving it.  
Status  
Details  
Description  
Paper Empty Paper Empty in Upper  
Drawer - Please Add Paper.  
Add paper in the Upper Drawer.  
Paper Empty in Lower  
Add paper in the Lower Drawer.  
Drawer - Please Add Paper.  
Paper Empty in Pedestal  
Upper Drawer - Please Add  
Paper.  
Add paper in the Pedestal Upper Drawer.  
Paper Empty in Pedestal  
Lower Drawer - Please Add  
Paper.  
Add paper in the Pedestal Lower Drawer.  
Paper Empty in Large Capac- Add paper in the Large Capacity Feeder.  
ity Feeder - Please Add  
Paper.  
Paper Empty in Stack Feed  
Bypass - Please Add Paper.  
Add paper in the Stack Feed Bypass.  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
359  
 
Status  
Details  
Description  
Close the Platen Cover.  
Cover Open Platen Cover Open - Please  
Close Cover  
Front Cover Open - Please  
Close Cover.  
Close the Front Cover.  
Main Feeding Cover Open - Close the Main Part Feeding Cover.  
Please Close Cover.  
Transfer Cover Open - Please Close the Transfer Cover.  
Close Cover.  
Lower Side Cover Open -  
Please Close Cover.  
Close the Large Capacity Feeder Feeding  
Cover.  
Drawer Open - Please Close Close the Drawer Cover.  
Cover.  
Auto Duplex Unit Cover  
Close the duplex unit cover.  
Open - Please Close Cover.  
Relay Unit Cover Open -  
Please Close Cover.  
Close the Relay Unit Cover.  
Finisher Door Open - Please Close the Finisher Door.  
Close Door.  
Lower Tray Transport Cover Close the Lower Tray Transport Cover.  
Open - Please Close Cover.  
Lower Tray Delivery Cover Close the Lower Tray Delivery Cover.  
Open - Please Close Cover.  
Lower Tray Front Cover  
Close the Lower Tray Front Cover.  
Open - Please Close Cover.  
Hole Punch Unit Front Cover Close the Punch Unit Front Cover.  
Open - Please Close Cover.  
Hole Punch Unit Cover Open Close the Punch Unit Cover.  
- Please Close Cover.  
Job Separator Cover Open - Close the Job Separator Cover.  
Please Close Cover.  
Offset Tray Cover Open -  
Please Close Cover.  
Close the Offset Tray Cover.  
360  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
Status  
Details  
Description  
Paper Jam  
Paper Jam in Auto Duplex  
Unit - Please Clear Paper  
Path  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Jam in Stack Feed  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Bypass - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.  
Path  
Paper Jam in Upper Drawer - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Please Clear Paper Path  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Jam in Large Capacity Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Feeder - Please Clear Paper  
Path  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Jam in Pedestal Upper Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Drawer - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.  
Path  
Paper Jam in Pedestal Lower Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Drawer - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.  
Path  
Paper Jam in Finisher -  
Please Clear Paper Path  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Jam in Printer - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Clear Paper Path to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Jam in Job Separator - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Please Clear Paper Path.  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Jam in Offset Tray -  
Please Clear Paper Path.  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Ejection Jam - Please  
Clear Paper Path  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Insertion Jam - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Clear Paper Path  
to remove jammed paper.  
Paper Jam in Auto Docu-  
ment Feeder - Please Clear  
Paper Path  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
to remove jammed paper.  
Toner Full  
Used Toner Container Full - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Please Replace. to replace the Toner Container.  
Toner Empty Black Toner Empty - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Refill.  
to replace the Black Toner.  
Cyan Toner Empty - Please  
Refill.  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
to replace the Cyan Toner.  
Magenta Toner Empty -  
Please Refill.  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
to replace the Magenta Toner.  
Yellow Toner Empty - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Refill.  
to replace the Yellow Toner.  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
361  
Status  
Details  
Description  
Toner Near  
Empty  
Black Toner Cartridge  
Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Black Toner.  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Cartridge Before System is  
Empty.  
Cyan Toner Cartridge  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Cyan Toner.  
Cartridge Before System is  
Empty.  
Magenta Toner Cartridge  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Magenta Toner.  
Cartridge Before System is  
Empty.  
Yellow Toner Cartridge  
Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display  
Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Yellow Toner.  
Cartridge Before System is  
Empty.  
Staple Empty Staple Empty - Please Set  
Staple Cartridge  
Set the Staple Cartridge. Refer to the Opera-  
tor’s Manual for Basic Function for instruc-  
tion.  
Finisher’s Lower Tray Sta-  
ples are Empty - Please  
Replace Saddle Staple Car-  
tridge  
Set the Saddle Staple Cartridge. Refer to the  
Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for  
instruction.  
362  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
Status  
Details  
Description  
Printer Error Finisher Disconnected -  
Please Join Finisher to  
Copier.  
Join the Finisher to the copier stably.  
Hole Punch Jam in Finisher - Clear hole punches from the Finisher. Refer to  
Please Clear Hole Punch  
the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for  
instruction.  
Staple Jam in Finisher -  
Please Clear Staple  
Remove jammed staples from the Finisher.  
Refer to the Operator’s Manual for Basic  
Function for instruction.  
Staple Jam in Lower Tray of Remove jammed staples from the Saddle-stitch  
Finisher - Please Clear Staple Finisher. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for  
Basic Function for instruction.  
Toner Error - Please Use  
Genuine TOSHIBA Toner.  
Check and adjust the toner bottle.  
Finisher Lower Tray Full -  
Please Remove Paper  
Remove paper from the Lower Tray of Sad-  
dle-stitch Finisher.  
Mixed Sized Paper not  
Allowed - Please Check  
Paper  
Check the paper.  
Finisher Tray 1 Paper Full -  
Please Remove Paper.  
Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 1.  
Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 2.  
Finisher Tray 2 Paper Full -  
Please Remove Paper.  
Inner Tray Paper Full - Please Remove paper from the Inner Tray.  
Remove Paper.  
Hole Punch Full in Finisher- Dispose the punched paper bits. Refer to the  
Please Clear Hole Punch.  
Job Separator Upper Paper  
Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for  
instruction.  
Remove paper form the Job Separator Upper  
Full - Please Remove Paper. Tray.  
Job Separator Lower Paper  
Remove paper from the Job Separator Lower  
Full - Please Remove Paper. Tray.  
Offset Tray Full - Please  
Remove Paper.  
Remove paper from the Offset Tray.  
Printer Output Error - Please Contact your service representative.  
Contact Service Technician.  
Printer Input Error - Please  
Contact Service Technician.  
Contact your service representative.  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
363  
Status  
Details  
Description  
Contact Ser- Auto Document Feeder Error Contact your service representative.  
vice Techni- - Please Contact Service  
cian  
Technician.  
Alignment Error in Auto  
Document Feeder - Please  
Contact Service Technician.  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
Motor Error in Auto Docu-  
ment Feeder - Please Contact  
Service Technician.  
I/F Error in Auto Document Contact your service representative.  
Feeder - Please Contact Ser-  
vice Technician.  
Fatal Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.  
Service Technician.  
Main Motor Error - Please  
Contact Service Technician.  
Contact your service representative.  
Fuser Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.  
Service Technician.  
Scanner Error - Please Con- Contact your service representative.  
tact Service Technician.  
Motor Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.  
Service Technician.  
HDD Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.  
Service Technician.  
The Time for Periodic Main- Contact your service representative.  
tenance - Please Contact Ser-  
vice Technician.  
Device Status Indicators  
The Printer Image area for the TopAccessDocMon Device tab window displays visual Device  
Status Indicators in the event of a device malfunction.  
•
Printer Error 1  
The above printer error icon indicate that non-recommended toner is being used. For infor-  
mation on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE SYM-  
BOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.  
•
Printer Error 2  
The above printer error icon indicates:  
-
You need to remove paper from standard output tray.  
364  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
   
-
-
-
You need to remove paper from Job Separator.  
You need to remove paper from Finisher tray.  
You need to remove staples jammed in the Finisher. For information on resolving the  
error condition, refer to “CLEAR PAPER SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic  
Function.  
-
-
You need to clear hole punches from Finisher. For information on resolving the error  
condition, refer to “DISPOSING OF THE PUNCHED PAPER BITS (OPTIONAL)” in  
Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.  
Non-recommended toner is being used. For information on resolving the error condition,  
refer to “REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for  
Basic Function.  
-
-
-
-
You need to remove excess staples from the Saddle-stitch Finisher.  
You performed saddle stitch printing using mixed paper sizes.  
Cannot load paper from the LCF.  
Cannot output to inner tray.  
•
•
Cover Open  
The Cover Open error icon indicates that you need to close the cover.  
Drawer Open  
The Drawer Open error icon shows that drawer is open. You must close the specified drawer  
to resume printing and copying functions.  
•
Toner Empty  
The color of the Toner Empty icon varies depending on which toner cartridge is empty:  
-
-
-
-
Black — Black Toner Empty  
Cyan — Cyan Toner Empty  
Magenta — Magenta Toner Empty  
Yellow — Yellow Toner Empty  
For information on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER CAR-  
TRIDGE SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.  
•
Toner Full  
The Toner Full error icon indicates you need to replace the toner container. For information  
on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER BAG SYMBOL” in Opera-  
tor’s Manual for Basic Function.  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
365  
•
Paper Empty  
The Out of Paper error icon shows that drawer is empty. A paper out condition does not nec-  
essarily terminate a print or copy job. If Auto-select options are configured, printing and  
copying may continue by drawing paper from a different drawer. Refer to the TopAccess  
online Help for instructions on setting up Auto-Select mode. For information on resolving  
the error condition, refer to “ADD PAPER SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic  
Function.  
•
•
•
Paper Jam  
The Paper Jam icon indicates that you need to remove jammed paper from the equipment.  
For information on resolving the error condition, refer to “CLEAR PAPER SYMBOL” in  
Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.  
Staple Empty  
The Add Staples error icon indicates you need to add staples to the finisher. For information  
on resolving the error condition, refer to “ADDING STAPLES (OPTIONAL)” in Operator’s  
Manual for Basic Function.  
Serviceman Calls  
The Service Call error icon indicates that a call for service is needed. Contact your service  
representative.  
366  
Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors  
6. APPENDIX  
Printing Guide — 6. Appendix  
367  
 
Managing Fonts with Font Manager  
The Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 program can be used to manage your fonts in Win-  
dows. This program can be launch by clicking [Run Font Manager] on the Fonts tab of the  
printer driver.  
It can:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search your local and network drives for fonts.  
Install and uninstall fonts in Windows.  
Remove fonts from your computer.  
Preview or print the fonts on your computer or network.  
Create font groups for personal or workgroup projects.  
Sort your fonts in a variety of ways, etc.  
Installing Font Manager  
For e-STUDIO4511 Series, the Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 can be installed from the  
Client1 CD-ROM. For instructions on how to install the Font Manager for e-STUDIO4511  
Series, refer to the section that describes the installation using the Installer in the Client1  
CD-ROM.  
For e-STUDIO450 Series and e-STUDIO280 Series, the Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000  
can be installed from the Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.  
To install the Font Manager for e-STUDIO450 Series or e-STUDIO280 Series, double-click the  
“Setup.exe” file in the Font CD-ROM and follow the screens.  
Searching Fonts  
The first time you start Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000, the Find Fonts dialog box appears  
automatically. Before installing a font in Windows, you have to search the available fonts that  
can be installed by Font Manager 2000.  
Searching fonts  
1. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Search for Fonts...].  
•
The Find Fonts dialog box appears.  
2. Select which drive you want to search for fonts.  
Selected Drives — Select this to choose one of the drives when searching for  
fonts.  
All Drives — Select this to search on all drives when searching for fonts.  
Selected Paths — Select this to enter the path to the drive when searching for  
fonts. Enter the path to the drive you want to search when you select this.  
3. Click [OK].  
•
•
•
When you select “Selected Drives”, Continue to the next step.  
When you select “All Drives”, skip to Step 6.  
When you select “Selected Paths”, skip to Step 6.  
4. The Select Drives dialog box appears.  
5. Select a drive to search for fonts from the list and click [OK].  
6. Searching for fonts begins. The Search for fonts... dialog box  
is displayed while searching for fonts.  
368  
Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager  
           
•
If you cancel to search for fonts, click [Stop].  
7. The searched fonts are displayed at the Available Font list.  
Installing Fonts in Windows  
After searching the fonts, you can install them in Windows. Once the fonts are installed in Win-  
dows, the fonts can be displayed on the dialog box in applications and printed by the machine.  
Installing the TrueType fonts  
1. Highlight the fonts you want to install in Windows from the  
“Available Font List”.  
2. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Install].  
3. The fonts are installed in Windows and added to the installed  
fonts list.  
Uninstalling Fonts in Windows  
You can uninstall the fonts in Windows. However, even if you uninstall the fonts from Windows,  
the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted from the drive.  
Uninstalling the TrueType fonts  
1. Highlight the fonts you want to uninstall from Windows from  
the installed fonts list.  
2. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Un-install].  
3. The fonts are uninstalled from Windows. The uninstalled  
fonts are added to the “Available Fonts List”.  
Removing Fonts from the Computer  
You can remove from your computer the fonts that no longer be required. Even if you uninstall  
the fonts from Windows, the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted from the hard  
drive. You can remove the sources of the uninstalled fonts from your computer by this function.  
Before removing the fonts, the fonts must be uninstalled from Windows first.  
Removing the TrueType font files from your computer  
1. Highlight the fonts you want to remove from your computer in  
the installed fonts list.  
2. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Remove Font].  
3. The Remove Fonts dialog box appears.  
Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager  
369  
     
4. Check on the box for “Delete font(s) from the hard disk” and  
click [OK].  
•
If you do not check on the checkbox for “Delete font(s) from the hard  
disk”, the source of the fonts are not deleted from the hard disk. If you  
want to remove the fonts from the Available Font List but do not want  
to delete the source file, do not check this checkbox.  
5. The source files of the fonts are deleted from the hard drive.  
Displaying Font Preview  
You can preview the fonts that are displayed in the Available Font List and the installed fonts  
list.  
Previewing fonts  
1. Highlight a font you want to preview from the Available Font  
List or the installed fonts list.  
2. Click [Fonts] menu and select [Preview].  
3. The Preview dialog box appears. The sample font is dis-  
played on the dialog box.  
Point Size — You can select the point size of the sample font displayed.  
Normal Styles — When this is selected, the font is displayed in the normal face  
on the dialog box.  
All Styles — When this is selected, the font is displayed in all of its available font  
faces in the dialog box.  
Creating a Font Group  
You can create a group of fonts and give a descriptive name to the group. The created group can  
be used to install or uninstall the fonts in Windows. This function can be used to configure the  
different working scenarios of the fonts for each user.  
Creating a font group  
1. Select the Font Groups folder and click the [Fonts] menu and  
select [New Group...].  
•
The New Group dialog box appears.  
2. Enter the group name in the Group Name field.  
3. In the All Available Fonts, expand each folder and select the  
fonts that you want to add to the group.  
4. Click [Add>>].  
•
The selected fonts are added to the Fonts in Group list.  
5. Click [OK].  
370  
Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager  
   
6. The created group is added to the Font Groups list.  
Sorting Fonts in the List  
You can sort and change the order of fonts to be displayed in the Available Font and Installed  
Fonts list.  
Sorting by Name  
Click the [Sort] menu and click [Sort by Name]. The fonts are listed alphabetically by the font  
family name.  
Sorting by Font Type  
Click the [Sort] menu and click [Sort by Font Type]. The fonts are grouped according to their  
technology type (TrueType, Type 1, or screen bitmap) and within each group the names will be  
listed alphabetically.  
Inverting the alphabetical Order  
The lists can be inverted by clicking on the [Sort] menu and [Inverse Sort].  
Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager  
371  
       
Internal Fonts List  
Internal PCL Fonts List  
0
Courier  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
Helvetica-BoldOblique  
Helvetica-Narrow  
1
CG-Times  
2
CG-Times Bold  
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold  
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique  
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique  
Palatino-Roman  
3
CG-Times Italic  
CG-Times Bold Italic  
CG Omega  
4
5
6
CG Omega Bold  
Palatino-Bold  
7
CG Omega Italic  
CG Omega Bold Italic  
Coronet  
Palatino-Italic  
8
Palatino-BoldItalic  
ITC AvantGarde-Book  
ITC AvantGarde-BookOblique  
ITC AvantGarde-Demi  
ITC AvantGarde-DemiOblique  
ITC Bookman-Light  
ITC Bookman-LightItalic  
ITC Bookman-Demi  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
Clarendon Condensed  
Univers Medium  
Univers Bold  
Univers Italic  
Univers Bold Italic  
Univers Medium Condensed  
Univers Condensed Bold  
ITC Bookman-DemiItalic  
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman  
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold  
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic  
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic  
Times-Roman  
Univers Medium Condensed Italic57  
Univers Condensed Bold Italic 58  
Antique Olive  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
Antique Olive Bold  
Antique Olive Italic  
Garamond Antiqua  
Garamond Halbfett  
Garamond Kursiv  
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett  
Mrigold  
Times-Bold  
Times-Italic  
Times-BoldItalic  
ITCZapfChancery-MediumItalic  
Symbol  
Albertus Medium  
Albertus Extra Bold  
Arial  
Symbol PS  
Wingdings  
ITCZapfDingbats  
Arial Bold  
Courier Bold  
Arial Italic  
Courier Italic  
Arial Bold Italic  
Times New Roman  
Times New Roman Bold  
Times New Roman Italic  
Times New Roman Bold Italic  
Helvetica  
Courier Bold Italic  
Letter Gothic Regular  
Letter Gothic Bold  
Letter Gothic Italic  
CourierPS  
CourierPS Oblique  
CourierPS Bold  
Helvetica-Bold  
Helvetica-Oblique  
CourierPS BoldOblique  
372  
Printing Guide — Internal Fonts List  
     
Internal PS Fonts List  
1
AlbertusMT-Light  
AlbertusMT  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
Geneva  
2
GillSans-Light  
3
AlbertusMT-Italic  
AntiqueOlive-Roman  
AntiqueOlive-Italic  
AntiqueOlive-Bold  
AntiqueOlive-Compact  
Apple-Chancery  
ArialMT  
GillSans-LightItalic  
GillSans  
4
5
GillSans-Italic  
6
GillSans-Bold  
7
GillSans-BoldItalic  
GillSans-ExtraBold  
GillSans-BoldCondensed  
GillSans-Condensed  
Goudy  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
Arial-ItalicMT  
Arial-BoldMT  
Arial-BoldItalicMT  
AvantGarde-Book  
AvantGarde-BookOblique  
AvantGarde-Demi  
AvantGarde-DemiOblique  
Bodoni  
Goudy-Italic  
Goudy-Bold  
Goudy-BoldItalic  
Goudy-ExtraBold  
Helvetica  
Helvetica-Oblique  
Helvetica-Bold  
Bodoni-Italic  
Bodoni-Bold  
Helvetica-BoldOblique  
Helvetica-Condensed  
Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique  
Helvetica-Condensed-Bold  
Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl  
Helvetica-Narrow  
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique  
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold  
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique  
HoeflerText-Regular  
HoeflerText-Italic  
HoeflerText-Black  
HoeflerText-BlackItalic  
HoeflerText-Ornaments  
JoannaMT  
Bodoni-BoldItalic  
Bodoni-Poster  
Bodoni-PosterCompressed  
Bookman-Light  
Bookman-LightItalic  
Bookman-Demi  
Bookman-DemiItalic  
Candid  
Chicago  
Clarendon-Light  
Clarendon  
Clarendon-Bold  
CooperBlack  
CooperBlack-Italic  
Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC  
Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC  
Coronet-Regular  
Courier  
JoannaMT-Italic  
JoannaMT-Bold  
JoannaMT-BoldItalic  
LetterGothic  
Courier-Oblique  
Courier-Bold  
LetterGothic-Slanted  
LetterGothic-Bold  
LetterGothic-BoldSlanted  
LubalinGraph-Book  
LubalinGraph-BookOblique  
LubalinGraph-Demi  
LubalinGraph-DemiOblique  
Courier-BoldOblique  
Eurostile  
Eurostile-Bold  
Eurostile-ExtendedTwo  
Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo  
Printing Guide — Internal Fonts List  
373  
   
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
Marigold  
135 ZapfChancery-MediumItalic  
136 ZapfDingbats  
Monaco  
MonaLisa-Recut  
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman  
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic  
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold  
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic  
NewYork  
Optima  
Optima-Italic  
Optima-Bold  
100 Optima-BoldItalic  
101 Oxford  
102 Palatino-Roman  
103 Palatino-Italic  
104 Palatino-Bold  
105 Palatino-BoldItalic  
106 StempelGaramond-Roman  
107 StempelGaramond-Italic  
108 StempelGaramond-Bold  
109 StempelGaramond-BoldItalic  
110 Symbol  
111 Taffy  
112 Times-Roman  
113 Times-Italic  
114 Times-Bold  
115 Times-BoldItalic  
116 TimesNewRomanPSMT  
117 TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT  
118 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT  
119 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT  
120 Univers-Light  
121 Univers-LightOblique  
122 Univers  
123 Univers-Oblique  
124 Univers-Bold  
125 Univers-BoldOblique  
126 Univers-Condensed  
127 Univers-CondensedOblique  
128 Univers-CondensedBold  
129 Univers-CondensedBoldOblique  
130 Univers-Extended  
131 Univers-ExtendedObl  
132 Univers-BoldExt  
133 Univers-BoldExtObl  
134 Wingdings-Regular  
374  
Printing Guide — Internal Fonts List  
7. INDEX  
Printing Guide — 7. INDEX  
375  
 
INDEX  
Brightness ...................................................... 240  
Bypass Feeder ............................................... 247  
Numerics  
2-Sided Printing  
UNIX ..........................................................313  
Windows .............................................223, 257  
C
Center Margin  
UNIX .......................................................... 318  
Windows ............................................231, 261  
Change Rate .................................................. 332  
Chooser .......................................................... 271  
Collated  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 274  
Mac OS X .................................................. 291  
Color ......................................................221, 256  
Color Matching ............................................. 276  
Color Mode ................................................... 310  
Color Resolution Type  
A
About .............................................................249  
Add Device ................................... 342, 343, 345  
Advanced  
Local Discovery .................................336, 338  
Network Discovery ............................344, 346  
Agfa Font Manager ..................................18, 368  
All pages from ...............................................298  
Always Download needed fonts ....................277  
Annotate Font Keys .......................................277  
Auto Duplexer ...............................................247  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 287  
Mac OS X .................................................. 307  
Compress Bitmap .......................................... 238  
Configuration ............................... 206, 207, 246  
Configuring the Options ................................ 204  
Copies  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 274  
Mac OS X .................................................. 291  
Copies & Pages ............................................. 291  
Copy Handling ......................................221, 254  
Cover Page  
B
Background Printing ......................................275  
Banner Media Type .......................................323  
Banner Options ..............................................322  
Banner Page ...................................................321  
Banner Paper Source ......................................322  
Binding  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................279  
Mac OS X ...................................................294  
Black Over Print  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 276  
Mac OS X .................................................. 297  
Cover Page Paper Source .............................. 277  
Cover Page Type ........................................... 297  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................288  
Mac OS X ...................................................308  
UNIX ..........................................................323  
Windows .....................................................243  
Booklet  
Mac OS X ...................................................299  
UNIX ..........................................................316  
Windows .....................................................230  
Booklet Center Margin  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................285  
Mac OS X ...................................................299  
Booklet Mode Options ...................................284  
Booklet Outer Margin  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................285  
Mac OS X ...................................................299  
Booklet Page Layout ......................................285  
Booklet Page Size  
D
DC (Department Code) ................................. 300  
Department Code  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 284  
Mac OS X .................................................. 300  
UNIX .......................................................... 315  
Windows ............................................208, 226  
Department Code (DC) On ........................... 306  
Destination  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 280  
Mac OS X .................................................. 302  
UNIX .......................................................... 311  
Windows .................................................... 225  
Device Status tab ........................................... 341  
DIN (Document ID Number) ........................ 301  
Discovered Device ........................................ 343  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................284  
Mac OS X ...................................................299  
Border  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................279  
Mac OS X ...................................................293  
376  
Printing Guide — INDEX  
INDEX  
Discovery Settings  
Format for  
Local Discovery .........................................338  
Network Discovery ....................................346  
Distinguish Thin Lines  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 273  
Mac OS X .................................................. 290  
G
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................284  
Mac OS X ...................................................306  
PCL5c .........................................................240  
PCL6 ...........................................................241  
PS3 .............................................................243  
UNIX ..........................................................315  
Do not Print Blank Page ................................237  
Do not Print Blank Pages  
General .......................................................... 274  
Group Copies .........................................221, 254  
H
Halftone  
Mac OS X ..........................................288, 308  
PCL5c ........................................................ 239  
PCL6 .......................................................... 241  
PS3 ............................................................. 242  
Help ............................................................... 217  
Hole Punch  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 280  
Mac OS X .................................................. 302  
UNIX .......................................................... 312  
Windows ............................................223, 257  
Hole Punch Unit ............................................ 247  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x 284  
Mac OS X ...................................................306  
UNIX ..........................................................316  
Document  
Cancel .................................................339, 348  
Print Now ...........................................340, 349  
Release ...............................................340, 349  
Release Proof ......................................339, 348  
Document Monitor Taskbar Menu ................329  
Draw Border Around Pages ...................233, 264  
Duplex  
I
If there is PostScript error ............................. 278  
Image Quality ................................................ 239  
Image Quality Type  
Mac OS X ...................................................294  
UNIX ..........................................................313  
PCL5c ........................................................ 239  
PS3 ............................................................. 242  
Insert Page ..................................................... 228  
Insert Pages ................................................... 259  
Installed .................................................330, 333  
Installing  
IPP Printing ................................................ 127  
LPR Printing ................................................ 66  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 169  
Mac OS X .................................................. 176  
Novell Printing ........................................... 132  
Parallel Printing ........................................... 25  
Peer-to-Peer Printing .................................. 118  
SMB Printing ............................................... 89  
TopAccess .................................................. 198  
UNIX Filters .............................................. 186  
USB Printing ................................................ 53  
Intent .............................................................. 276  
Interleave Pages  
E
Effect ..............................................................235  
e-Filing tab .....................................................347  
Email printing ................................................325  
Enable SNMP Communication ......................248  
Error Handling  
Mac OS X ...................................................298  
Events ............................................................330  
F
Fax tab ...........................................................347  
Finisher ..........................................................247  
Finishing Options  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................280  
Mac OS X ...................................................302  
First page from ...............................................298  
Font ................................................................244  
Font Pitch .......................................................319  
Font Settings ..................................................277  
Format ............................................................295  
Multiple Pages per Sheet ...................234, 265  
Standard .............................................230, 259  
Internet Connection ......................................... 23  
Invalid tab ...................................................... 347  
Printing Guide — INDEX  
377  
INDEX  
Number of Copies ......................................... 221  
Number of Pages per Sheet  
UNIX .......................................................... 317  
Number of pages per Sheet ........................... 263  
Number of pages per sheet ............................ 233  
Number Pages from Right to Left .........231, 262  
J
Job Documentation ........................................278  
Job Documentation Folder .............................278  
Job Logging ...................................................277  
L
Large Capacity ...............................................247  
LaserWriter 8 .................................................271  
Layout  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................278  
Mac OS X ...................................................292  
Window ......................................................230  
Windows .............................................226, 233  
Layout Direction  
Mac OS X ...................................................293  
Layout direction .............................................279  
Left Margin ....................................................320  
Left to Right Page Layout  
Mac OS X ...................................................299  
Local Area Network over TCP/IP ...................21  
Local Discovery .....................................335, 336  
Lower Drawer ................................................247  
lp command ...................................................309  
LPR Printing ....................................................22  
lptap command ...............................................309  
O
Orientation  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 273  
Mac OS X .................................................. 290  
UNIX .......................................................... 318  
Windows .................................................... 221  
Original Paper Size ................................218, 255  
Outer Margin  
UNIX .......................................................... 318  
Windows ............................................231, 262  
Output Bin ..................................................... 311  
Output Document Layout ......................230, 261  
Output Format ............................................... 238  
Output Options .............................................. 295  
P
Page Attributes  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 273  
Mac OS X .................................................. 290  
Page Length ................................................... 319  
Page per Sheet  
M
Macintosh AppleTalk printing  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 278  
Mac OS X .................................................. 292  
Paper Feed ..................................................... 298  
Paper Handling  
Mac OS X .................................................. 296  
Paper Source .................................................. 220  
Paper Type  
UNIX .......................................................... 312  
Windows .................................................... 220  
Parallel Port Connection .................................. 20  
PCL Fonts ...................................................... 372  
PCL5c Printer Driver ...................................... 19  
PCL6 Printer Driver ........................................ 19  
Pedestal .......................................................... 246  
Pedestal Lower .............................................. 247  
Pedestal Upper ............................................... 247  
Peer-to-Peer Utility ......................................... 18  
Plug and Play  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................174  
Mac OS X ...................................................180  
Macintosh IP printing ....................................177  
Macintosh LPR printing ................................170  
Manual Scale .........................................219, 255  
Manual Selection  
Local Discovery .........................................337  
Network Discovery ....................................345  
Memory ..........................................................248  
Method ...........................................................331  
Mirror .............................................................236  
Monitoring Device .........................................346  
Multiple Pages per Sheet ...............................233  
N
Negative/Positive ...........................................236  
Network Discovery ................................343, 345  
Never generate Type 42 format .....................277  
Normal Print ..................................................224  
Notification ............................................329, 330  
Novell Printing .................................................24  
Parallel Printing ........................................... 31  
USB Printing ................................................ 54  
Point and Print .......................................100, 140  
378  
Printing Guide — INDEX  
INDEX  
PostScript Error .............................................298  
PostScript Printer Description File ................169  
PostScript Settings .................................237, 238  
Preferred Format ............................................277  
Preview window ............................................217  
Print Color .....................................................276  
Print Cover Page ....................................276, 297  
Print Document ..............................................295  
Print Error Information ..................................238  
Print in ...........................................................275  
Print Job .........................................................224  
Print Language ...............................................310  
Print Mode  
Pure Gray  
UNIX .......................................................... 319  
Windows ............................................240, 243  
Q
Quality  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 286  
Mac OS X .................................................. 306  
R
Refresh Rates .........................................330, 331  
Document Notification ............................... 332  
Print Queue ................................................ 333  
Printer Status .............................................. 332  
Remaining from ............................................. 299  
Resolution  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................283  
Mac OS X ...................................................306  
Print on Both Sides  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................279  
Mac OS X ...................................................294  
Print Paper Size ......................................219, 255  
Print Queue tab ..............................................347  
Print Time ......................................................275  
Print to Overlay File ..............................225, 251  
Printer  
Change Printer ............................................339  
Close ...........................................................339  
Printer Driver ...................................................18  
Printer Features ..............................................299  
Printer Profile .................................................276  
Printing Modes  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................283  
Mac OS X ...................................................305  
UNIX ..........................................................314  
Priority ...........................................................296  
Private Print ...........................................225, 250  
Private Print Document ID ............................301  
Private Print tab .............................................347  
Profile ............................................................217  
Profiles ...........................................................213  
Proof Print ..............................................225, 251  
Proof Print tab ................................................347  
PS Fonts .........................................................373  
PS3 Printer Driver ............................................19  
Pure Black  
PCL5c ........................................................ 239  
PCL6 .......................................................... 241  
PS3 ............................................................. 242  
Restore Defaults ............................................ 217  
Reverse page order ........................................ 296  
Right Margin ................................................. 320  
Rotate 180 degrees ........................................ 236  
Rotated Sort Copies ...............................221, 254  
Run Font Manager .................................245, 368  
S
Saturation ...................................................... 240  
Save as File .................................................... 295  
Scale  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 274  
Mac OS X .................................................. 290  
Scheduled Print .....................................224, 249  
Scheduled Print tab ........................................ 347  
Scheduler  
Mac OS X .................................................. 295  
Setup .............................................................. 218  
SMB Printing ................................................... 22  
Smoothing  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ...................................... 288  
Mac OS X .................................................. 308  
PCL5c ........................................................ 240  
PCL6 .......................................................... 241  
PS3 ............................................................. 243  
UNIX .......................................................... 315  
Sort Copies ............................................221, 254  
Standard ......................................................... 226  
Staple .....................................................222, 256  
Staple Down the Center .........................231, 262  
UNIX ..........................................................319  
Windows .....................................................243  
Pure Black & Gray  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................287  
Mac OS X ...................................................308  
Printing Guide — INDEX  
379  
INDEX  
Stapling  
Use Black for All Text  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................281  
Mac OS X ...................................................303  
UNIX ..........................................................310  
Start Discovery  
PCL5c ........................................................ 240  
PCL6 .......................................................... 241  
PS3 ............................................................. 244  
Use Front Cover  
Local Discovery .........................................335  
Network Discovery ....................................343  
Startup ....................................................329, 330  
Status Messages  
Print Job ......................................................352  
Stop Discovery  
Booklet ...............................................231, 262  
Multiple Pages per Sheet ...................234, 264  
Standard .............................................227, 258  
Use Overlay Image ................................236, 268  
Use PostScript Passthrough ........................... 238  
Using Peer-to-Peer Utility ............................... 23  
Local Discovery .........................................335  
Network Discovery ....................................343  
Store to e-Filing ............................ 225, 252, 253  
Substitution Table Edit ..................................245  
System Requirements  
Macintosh ...................................................169  
UNIX ..........................................................186  
Windows .......................................................19  
V
View  
Configure ................................................... 340  
Refresh ....................................................... 340  
Status Bar ................................................... 340  
W
Watermark .................................... 235, 237, 265  
Creating ...................................................... 266  
Deleting ...................................................... 267  
Editing ........................................................ 266  
Printing ....................................................... 265  
Watermark Options ....................................... 285  
Watermarking ................................................ 285  
T
Text Length ....................................................321  
Text Wrapping ...............................................320  
Toner Save  
Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ......................................288  
Mac OS X ...................................................308  
UNIX ..........................................................316  
Windows .....................................................236  
Top Margin ....................................................321  
TopAccessComposer tab ...............................347  
TopAccessDocMon .................................18, 328  
TopAccessDocMon window .........................339  
Tray Switching ...............................................298  
TrueType Options ..........................................244  
Two Sided Printing ........................................293  
U
Uninstalling ....................................................162  
UNIX Print Queue  
Changing the default values .......................193  
Creating ......................................................188  
Deleting ......................................................193  
Update Automatically ....................................248  
Update Now ...................................................248  
Upper Drawer ................................................247  
USB Connection ..............................................21  
Use Back Cover  
Multiple Pages per Sheet ....................234, 264  
Standard ..............................................227, 258  
380  
Printing Guide — INDEX  
FC-3511/4511  
DP-3520/4520  
DP-2320/2820  
OME030033E0  
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS  
Printing Guide  
1-1, KANDA NISHIKI-CHO, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO, 101-8442, JAPAN  
2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved  
R03072037405-TTEC  
Ver05 2004-09  

Xerox All In One Printer Copycentre C20 User Manual
Whirlpool Acq304xs0 User Manual
Source Technologies Ac060x1223a B User Manual
Sanyo Kr 1100ael User Manual
Philips Scb4050nb User Manual
Murphy Bc1524 User Manual
MAKITA HM1100 User Manual
CREE CS18 User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 316.731930 User Manual
BLAUPUNKT CASABLANCA RCM 127 User Manual